all | frequencies |
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|
manual |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
08 user guide | Users Manual | 5.59 MiB | October 08 2012 | |||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | March 09 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | March 09 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | October 08 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | October 08 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | External Photos | October 08 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | October 08 2012 | ||||||
1 2 |
|
06 test report 15B | Test Report | 571.39 KiB | October 08 2012 | |||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | October 08 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | Internal Photos | October 08 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | October 08 2012 |
1 2 | 08 user guide | Users Manual | 5.59 MiB | October 08 2012 |
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 1 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 FOREWORD READ FIRSTTHEN DRIVE SAFELY In addition to factory installed options, your ve-
hicle may also be equipped with additional ac-
cessories installed by NISSAN or by your NISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. See a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular ac-
cessories with which your vehicle is equipped. Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control. This manual was prepared to help you under-
stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties cov-
ering your vehicle. The NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about maintaining and servicing your ve-
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your states lemon law. Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them. Before driving your vehicle, please read this Owners Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-
iarity with controls and maintenance require-
ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle. WARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-
MINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers!
NEVER drive under the influence of al-
cohol or drugs. ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions. ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you. ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-
priate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat. ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. ALWAYS review this Owners Manual for important safety information. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 2 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE could affect This vehicle should not be modified. Modification its performance, safety or durability, and may governmental regulations. In addition, damage or per-
formance problems resulting from modi-
fications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties. violate even WHEN READING THE MANUAL This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and with-
out obligation. IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:
APD1005 WARNING If you see this symbol, it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen. This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely. CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moder-
ate personal injury or damage to your ve-
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
cedures must be followed carefully. If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-
tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 3 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING WARNING Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-
ies, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: Perchlorate Material special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Visteon and Clarion. SiriusXM Satellite Radio requires sub-
scription, sold sepa-
rately. Not available in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam. For more information, visit www.siriusxm.com. 2012 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC. All rights reserved. No part of this Owners Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 4 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES . Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:
For U.S. customers 1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261) For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122 The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information:
Your name, address, and telephone number Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the drivers side) Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealers name Your comments or questions OR You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e-mail at:
For U.S. customers nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com For Canadian customers information.centre@nissancanada.com We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 5 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Table of Contents Illustrated table of contents SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Instruments and controls Pre-driving checks and adjustments Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do-it-yourself Technical and consumer information Index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 6 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 7 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 0 Illustrated table of contents Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . 0-2 Exterior front . 0-3 Exterior rear. 0-4 Passenger compartment . 0-5 Instrument panel. 0-6 Engine compartment check locations . 0-8 Warning/indicator lights . 0-10 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 8 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-23) 1. 2. Rear seat belts (P. 1-10) 3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact 4. supplemental air bag (P. 1-37) Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-37) Front seat belts (P. 1-10) 5. Head restraints (P. 1-7) 6. 7. Side-impact pressure sensor (drivers side shown; passengers side similar)
(P. 1-52) 8. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P. 1-37) 9. Seats (P. 1-2) 10. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P. 1-45) 11. Pretensioners (P. 1-45) 12. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-51) 13. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system (P. 1-21) See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details. 0-2 Illustrated table of contents LII2041 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 9 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 EXTERIOR FRONT Power windows (P. 2-42) 1. 2. Windshield (P. 8-21) 3. Windshield wiper and washer switch 4. 5. 6.
(P. 2-28) Engine hood (P. 3-27) Tie down (P. 6-12) Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-29) 7. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-30) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28) Tire pressure (P. 8-35) 8. 9. 10. Flat tire (P. 6-2) 11. Tire chains (P. 8-43) 12. Mirrors (P. 3-33) 13. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key , keys (P. 3-4, 3-6, 3-2) See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details. LII2038 Illustrated table of contents 0-3 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 10 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 EXTERIOR REAR Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-29) Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-29) Trunk lid (P. 3-27) 1. 2. 3. 4. Opener operation (P. 3-28) 5. 6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28) Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation
(P. 3-30, P. 9-3) Fuel-filler door (P. 3-30) 7. 8. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-6) See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details. 0-4 Illustrated table of contents LII2039 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 11 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Interior trunk access (P. 1-6) 1. 2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-45) 3. 4. 5. HomeLink universal transceiver Sun visors (P. 3-32) Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-47) 6.
(if so equipped) (P. 2-49) Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) (P. 3-33) 7. Glove box (P. 2-41) 8. Cup holders (P. 2-40 ) 9. Console box (P. 2-41) 10. Front seat (P. 1-2) 11. Rear seat (P. 1-6) See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details. LII2040 Illustrated table of contents 0-5 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 12 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 INSTRUMENT PANEL 7. Windshield wiper/washer switch 8. 9.
(P. 2-28) Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-35) Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-45) 10. Audio system controls/Navigation system* (P. 4-30) 11. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-37) 12. Glove box (P. 2-41) 13. Aux jack (P. 4-41, 4-47, 4-54) 14. Power outlet/USB port (P.2-38, 4-54, 4-56) 15. Heater and air conditioner (manual or automatic) (P. 4-19, P. 4-27) 16. Shift selector (P. 5-13) 17. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-8) 18. Cruise control main/set switch/
Bluetooth Hands-free Phone System
(P.5-19 / P. 4-96, P. 4-70, P. 4-85 ) 1. 2. 3. Instrument brightness control/Trip computer reset switch (P. 2-34, P. 2-4) Vents (P. 4-18) Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-30) 4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-37, P. 2-35) 5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3) 6. Paddle shift controls (if so equipped)
(P. 5-15)
(P. 3-32) 20. Steering wheel switch for audio control
/Vehicle information display controls
( P. 4-68, P. 2-17) 21. Fuel filler door release/Hood release)
(P. 3-30, P. 3-27) LIC2369 19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls 0-6 Illustrated table of contents REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 13 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 22. Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF switch
(P. 2-37) Trunk opener (P. 3-27) Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-37)
* Refer to the Navigation System Owners manual
(if so equipped) See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details. Illustrated table of contents 0-7 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 14 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-14) Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8) Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10) Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-15) Air cleaner (P. 8-20) Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23) Battery (P. 8-16) Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10) Radiator cap (P. 8-8) QR25DE engine 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Drive belt location (P. 8-19) 11. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir1 (P. 8-15) See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details. 0-8 Illustrated table of contents LDI2111 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 15 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-14) Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8) Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10) Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-15) Air cleaner (P. 8-20) Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23) Battery (P. 8-16) Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10) Radiator cap (P. 8-8) VQ35DE engine 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Drive belt location (P. 8-19) 11. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-15) See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details. LDI2112 Illustrated table of contents 0-9 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 16 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS Warning light Name Page Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warn-
ing light 2-10 Brake warning light 2-11 Warning light Indicator light or Charge warning light Low tire pressure warning light 2-11 2-11 Master warning light 2-13 Power steering warning light Seat belt warning light and chime 2-13 2-13 0-10 Illustrated table of contents Name Page Indicator light Name Page Side light and head-
light indicator light
(green) 2-15 Slip indicator light 2-15 Turn signal/hazard indicator lights Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light 2-16 2-16 Supplemental air bag warning light 2-13 Name Page Fog light indicator light (if so equipped) Front passenger air bag status light High beam indicator light (blue) Malfunction Indica-
tor Light (MIL) Overdrive off indica-
tor light (if so equipped) Security indicator light 2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 2-15 2-15 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 17 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 1 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Seats . 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment
(for passengers seat) . 1-2 Front power seat adjustment
(for drivers seat) . 1-4 Folding rear seat . 1-6 Head restraints. 1-7 Seat belts . 1-10 Precautions on seat belt usage. 1-10 Pregnant women . 1-13 Injured persons. 1-13 Three-point type seat belt with retractor . 1-13 Seat belt extenders . 1-16 Seat belt maintenance . 1-17 Child safety . 1-17 Infants. 1-18 Small children . 1-18 Larger children . 1-18 Child restraints . 1-19 Precautions on child restraints . 1-19 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System . 1-21 Rear-facing child restraint installation using LATCH . 1-23 Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . 1-25 Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH. 1-28 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . 1-30 Installing top tether strap . 1-33 Booster seats . 1-33 Supplemental restraint system . 1-37 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . 1-37 Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag systems . 1-50 Seat belts with pretensioners (Front seats) . 1-51 Supplemental air bag warning labels . 1-52 Supplemental air bag warning light . 1-52 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 18 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 SEATS WARNING Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. ARS1152 For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly. See Precau-
tions on seat belt usage later in this section. After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents. 1-2 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the pas-
senger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased. CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage. FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT (for passengers seat) REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 19 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 LRS2160 LRS2161 Forward and backward Reclining Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat in position. To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) position. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 20 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Reclining Move the recline switch backward until the de-
sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit, see Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) position. FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
(for drivers seat) Operating tips WARNING Before driving the vehicle, return the seat-
back to an upright seating position after manually releasing it. Also, make sure the seat is locked in place. Failure to do so may cause the seat to move in a collision or sudden stop. This may result in damage to the seat or personal injury. WRS0751 The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. If Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery. Forward and backward Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. 1-4 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 21 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WRS0740 LRS2162 WRS0743 Type A Type B Seat lifter (if so equipped for drivers seat) Type A: Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved. Type B: Push the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion. Lumbar support (if so equipped for drivers seat) The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Push the switch forward or backward to adjust the seat lumbar area. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 22 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi-
tion. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an acci-
dent or sudden stop. Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys. 1. Move the front passenger seat to the most forward position. 2. Open the access cover on the rear parcel shelf. 3. Push down on the button 1 on the rear parcel shelf. 4. Fold down the passengers side seatback 2 . WARNING Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an acci-
dent or sudden stop. Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. WRS0166 FOLDING REAR SEAT Interior trunk access The trunk can be accessed from the passenger side of the rear seat for loading and unloading, as shown. 1-6 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 23 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 HEAD RESTRAINTS WARNING Head restraints supplement the other ve-
hicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in cer-
tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head restraints properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head restraint. Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been re-
moved. If the head restraint was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
straint before an occupant uses the seat-
ing position. Failure to follow these in-
structions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. LRS2168 WRS0167 To fold down the drivers side of the rear seat, open the trunk and pull on the strap 1 . The rear seats can be locked using the mechani-
cal key to prevent unauthorized access. For more information on keys, refer to Keys in the Pre-
driving checks and adjustments section of this manual. Center armrest Pull the armrest down until it rests on the seat cushion. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 24 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 LRS2164 LRS0887 WRS0134 Adjustment Adjust the head restraint so the center is level with the center of the seat occupants ears. Components 1. Head restraint 2. Adjustment notches 3. Lock knob 4. Stalks The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints. Cloth seat: The front seat head restraints are adjustable and removable. The rear head re-
straints do not adjust or remove. Leather seat: The front and rear outboard head restraints are adjustable and removable. The cen-
ter headrest is not removable and does not ad-
just. Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint.
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or adjustable headrest. 1-8 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 25 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 LRS0888 LRS0889 LRS0890 To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down. Removal Use the following procedure to remove the ad-
justable head restraints. 1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest position. 2. Push and hold the lock knob. 3. Remove the head restraint from the seat. 4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not loose in the vehicle. 5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
straint before an occupant uses the seating position. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 26 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 SEAT BELTS LRS0891 SSS0136 Install 1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the adjustment notches 1 must be installed in the hole with the lock knob 2 . 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down. 3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position. PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag. Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven. 1-10 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 27 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WARNING Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat and, if appro-
priate, in a child restraint. SSS0134 SSS0016 WARNING The seat belt should be properly ad-
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 28 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle. Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt. Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. If the seat belt warning light glows con-
tinuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-
function in the system. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious per-
sonal injury. SSS0014 WARNING Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident. 1-12 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-
vated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. See your NISSAN dealer. Removal and installation of preten-
sioner system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer. and attaching All seat belt assemblies, including re-
tractors hardware, should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-
mends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced un-
less the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. All child restraints and attaching hard-
ware should be inspected after any col-
lision. Always follow the restraint manufacturers inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 29 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-
dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations. INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations. THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR WARNING Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly. Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a childs neck with the ALR mode acti-
vated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already un-
buckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 30 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Front seat shown Fastening the seat belts 1. Adjust the seat. See Seats earlier in this section. 1-14 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0751 LRS0594 2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. The retractor is designed to lock dur-
ing a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat. If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the re-
tractor. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 31 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts. The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation. When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. See Child re-
straints later in this section for more information. The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-
sion. WARNING When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely se-
cured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. LRS0595 3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. 4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest. The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three-point seat belts have two modes of operation:
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) WRS0139 Unfastening the seat belts 1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-
tracts. Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods:
When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. When the vehicle slows down rapidly. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 32 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows:
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
strict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt opera-
tion, see a NISSAN dealer. WARNING After adjustment, release the adjust-
ment button and try to move the shoul-
der belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position. The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effec-
tiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. SEAT BELT EXTENDERS If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available that can be purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in
(200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-
chasing an extender if an extender is required. LRS0242 Shoulder belt height adjustment (Front seats) The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-
justed to the position best for you. See Precau-
tions on seat belt usage earlier in this section. To adjust, pull out the adjustment button 1 and move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position 2 , so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul-
der belt anchor into position. 1-16 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 33 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WARNING Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts. Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident. Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sud-
den stop. SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recom-
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry. If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-
sembly should be replaced. CHILD SAFETY WARNING seating positions Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most are equipped with Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a childs neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Un-
buckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool
(such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt. Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained. In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 34 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 There are three basic types of child restraint systems:
Rear-facing child restraint Forward-facing child restraint Booster seat The proper restraint depends on the childs size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-
facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint. WARNING Infants and children need special protec-
tion. The vehicles seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-
ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-
tories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. See Child re-
straints later in this section. A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-
ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat belt. See Child restraints later in this section for more information. NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-
tem (air bag system) for the front passen-
ger. See Supplemental restraint system later in this section. INFANTS Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-
mends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-
facturers instructions for installation and use. SMALL CHILDREN Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-
facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing child re-
straint with a harness. Refer to the manufactur-
ers instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Ve-
hicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturers instructions for instal-
lation and use. LARGER CHILDREN Children should remain in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maxi-
mum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer. Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forward-facing child re-
straint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit 1-18 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 35 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 properly, the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoul-
der. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster seat can only be used in seating posi-
tions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck and the lap belt can be posi-
tioned properly across the lower hips or upper thighs use the seat belt without the booster seat. WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision. CHILD RESTRAINTS PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS ARS1098 WRS0256 WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installation and use. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 36 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Infants and children should never be held on anyones lap. Even the stron-
gest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision. Child restraint anchor points are de-
signed to withstand loads from child restraints that are properly fitted. Never use the anchor points for adult Do not put a seat belt around both a seat belts or harnesses. child and another passenger. NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, see Forward-facing child restraint in-
stallation using the seat belts later in this section. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could seri-
ously injure or kill a child. A rear-
facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat. Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle. A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat. Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-
sible after fitting the child restraint. Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child re-
straint while in the vehicle. When the child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, loose objects can injure occu-
pants or damage the vehicle. CAUTION A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating sur-
face and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint. This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-
tem. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-
nected to these anchors. For details, see LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-
tem later in this section. If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes. When se-
lecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:
Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system. If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your childs height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures. 1-20 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 37 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward-facing child restraints be secured to the designated an-
chor point on the vehicle. straint in the center position using the LATCH anchors. LATCH lower anchor WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-
tions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious in-
jury or death of a child or other passen-
gers in a sudden stop or collision:
Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration. Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly. Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
ing your fingers into the lower anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower an-
chors are obstructed. LRS2165 LATCH system anchor locations LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. The LATCH anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear outboard seating posi-
tions only. Do not attempt to install a child re-
SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 38 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WRS0796 LRS0661 LRS0662 LATCH rigid-mounted attachment When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint. LATCH lower anchor location LATCH lower anchor point locations The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is at-
tached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH anchors. LATCH webbing-mounted attachment Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child re-
straint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the in-
structions provided by the child restraint manu-
facturer. 1-22 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 39 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WRS0797 Top tether anchor point locations The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments or seat belts. See In-
stalling top tether strap later in this section. If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, consult your NISSAN dealer for details. Anchor points 1 are located on the rear parcel shelf. REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in-
stalling a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
ers instructions. Rear-facing web-mounted step 2 WRS0801 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 40 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Rear-facing rigid-mounted step 2 Rear-facing step 3 Rear-facing step 4 WRS0802 LRS0673 LRS0674 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors. 3. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments. 1-24 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
straint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-
hicles. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 41 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint repeat steps 2 through 4. is loose, WARNING The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the opera-
tion of the front passenger air bag. See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section. WRS0256 REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 42 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Rear-facing step 1 Rear-facing step 2 Rear-facing step 3 WRS0256 WRS0761 LRS0669 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers in-
structions for belt routing. 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections before in-
stalling a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions. 1-26 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 43 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Rear-facing step 4 Rear-facing step 5 Rear-facing step 6 LRS0670 WRS0762 WRS0763 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. 5. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt. 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 44 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt locked, repeat steps 1 through 6. is not After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in-
stalling a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
ers instructions. Forward-facing web-mounted step 2 WRS0799 WRS0800 Forward-facing rigid-mounted step 2 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. See Installing top tether strap in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seat-
ing positions that do not have a top tether anchor. 1-28 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 45 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed. See Head restraints in this section for head restraint adjustment, re-
moval and installation information. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint. Forward-facing step 4 Forward-facing step 6 LRS0671 WRS0697 4. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments. 5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturers instructions to remove any slack. 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
straint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 46 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint repeat steps 2 through 6. is loose, FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS WARNING The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the opera-
tion of the front passenger air bag. See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section. WRS0699 Forward-facing (front passenger seat) step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in-
stalling a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in 1-30 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system the rear-facing direction and, there-
fore, must not be used in the front seat. 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
ers instructions. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed. See Head restraints in this section for head restraint adjustment, re-
moval and installation information. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 47 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Forward-facing step 3 Forward-facing step 4 Forward-facing step 5 WRS0680 LRS0667 LRS0668 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers in-
structions for belt routing. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). See In-
stalling top tether strap in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 48 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt locked, repeat steps 2 through 8. is not Forward-facing step 6 Forward-facing step 8 WRS0681 WRS0698 6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt. 7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturers instructions to remove any slack. 8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 1-32 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 49 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint in-
stallation procedure steps in this section before tightening the tether strap. If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, consult your NISSAN dealer for details. BOOSTER SEATS Precautions on booster seats WARNING If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:
Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the childs face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach. Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the childs arm. A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt. WRS0475 LRS0798 10. Forward-facing step 10 If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag should illuminate. If this status light light is not illuminated, see Front passenger air bag and status light in this section. Move the child restraint to another seating position. Have system checked by a NISSAN dealer. the After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-
straint mode) is canceled. INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only) or the seat belt, as applicable. 1. Flip up the anchor cover 1 from the anchor point which is located directly behind the child seat. 2. Position the top tether strap over the top of the head restraint 2 . 3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the rear parcel shelf 3 . SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 50 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 LRS0455 LRS0453 LRS0464 Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system. 1-34 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 51 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Booster seat installation CAUTION Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts. Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety, Child Restraint and Booster Seats sections before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
Make sure the childs head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the childs ears. For example, if a low back booster seat 1 is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the childs ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the childs ears, a high back booster seat 2 should be used. If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recommended pro-
cedures. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat. WRS0699 1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rear-
most position. 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturers in-
structions. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 52 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat. 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the childs hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturers in-
structions for adjusting the seat belt routing. 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the childs shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturers instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in Three-point type seat belt with retractor earlier in this section. WRS0475 7. If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light may or may not illuminate, depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used. See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section. Front passenger position 3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. LRS0454 If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the booster seat is removed. See Head restraints in this sec-
tion for head restraint adjustment, removal and installation information. 1-36 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 53 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-
tion contains important information concerning the following systems:
Driver and passenger supplemental front-
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System) Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag Seat belt with pretensioner Supplemental front- impact air bag system:
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occu-
pants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side-impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, both curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time. These supplemental restraint systems are de-
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-
vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occu-
pant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-
ers. See Seat belts earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage. The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 54 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt us-
age then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. The front passenger seat is equipped with an Occupant Classification Sensor
(weight sensor) that turns the front pas-
senger air bag OFF under some condi-
tions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. See Front passenger air bag and sta-
tus light later in this section. Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
ing wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates. WARNING The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-
tal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied. See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section. WRS0031 The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-
tion in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practi-
cal from the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel. Always use the seat belts. 1-38 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 55 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 ARS1133 ARS1041 WARNING Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 56 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044 1-40 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 57 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 ARS1045 ARS1046 WRS0431 WARNING WARNING Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat, if possible. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An in-
flating front air bag could seriously in-
jure or kill your child. See Child re-
straints earlier in this section for details. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bags:
The side air bags and curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 58 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WARNING The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. SSS0162 WRS0032 WARNING When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially care-
ful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation. 1-42 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 59 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 SSS0159 SSS0162 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 60 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Top tether strap anchor 1. 2. Rear seat belts 3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact 4. supplemental air bag Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag 5. Head restraints 6. Front seat belts 7. Side-impact pressure sensor (drivers side shown; passengers side similar) 8. Supplemental front-impact air bags 9. Seats 10. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) 11. Buckle pretensioner 12. Seat belt with pretensioner 13. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system 1-44 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LII2041 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 61 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats) WARNING To ensure proper operation of the passen-
gers advanced air bag system, please ob-
serve the following items. Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket. Do not place heavy loads heavier than 2.2 lb (4 kg) on the seatback, head re-
straint or in the seatback pocket. Do not store luggage behind the seat that can press into the seatback. Do not position the front passenger seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the front seat does contact the rear seat, the air bag system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag status light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may flash. If a forward facing child restraint is in-
stalled in the front passenger seat, do not position the front passenger seat so the child restraint contacts the instru-
ment panel. If the child restraint does contact the instrument panel, the sys-
tem may determine the seat is occupied and the passenger air bag may deploy in a collision. Also the front passenger air bag status light may not illuminate. See Child restraints earlier in this sec-
tion for information about installing and using child restraints. Confirm the operating condition with the front passenger air bag status light. If you notice that the front passenger air bag status light is not operating as de-
scribed later in this section, please take your vehicle to your NISSAN dealer to check classification system. the occupant This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, all of the information, cautions and warn-
ings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may in-
flate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system opera-
tion. Until you have confirmed with your dealer that your passenger seat occu-
pant classification system is working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating positions. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual stage inflators. It also monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit
(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and Occupant Classification Sensor (weight sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classification sensors are also monitored. Based on information from the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 62 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or un-
belted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions, depending on the weight detected on the passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passen-
ger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illumi-
nated, but the air bag will be off). See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section for further details. One front air bag inflat-
ing does not indicate improper performance of the system. If you have any questions about your air bag system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN dealer. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owners Manual. When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-
senger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation. The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision. The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. 1-46 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Front passenger air bag and status light WRS0475 WARNING The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some con-
ditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-
essary for most effective protection. Fail-
ure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 63 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Status light The front passenger air bag status light is located near the climate controls. After the igni-
tion switch is placed in the ON position, the front passenger air bag status light on the instru-
ment panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows:
Unoccupied passengers seat: The is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash. Passengers seat occupied by a small adult, child or child restraint as outlined in this section: The illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash. Occupied passenger seat and the passen-
ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec-
tion: The light is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is operational. Front passenger air bag The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-
matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system. The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-
matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements. The occupant classification sensors (weight sen-
sors) are on the seat cushion frame under the front passenger seat and are designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat. For ex-
ample, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, the occupant classification sensors can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF. The front passenger seat belt sensor is designed to detect if the seat belt is buckled. Based on the weight on the seat detected by the occupant classification sensor and the buckle state, the Advanced Air Bag System determines whether the front passenger air bag should be automati-
cally turned OFF as required by the regulations. ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-
ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effec-
tive protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag. NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-
ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. See Child restraints earlier in this section for proper use and installation. Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as out-
lined in this manual should not cause the passen-
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the objects weight detected by the occupant SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 64 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly. Using the passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-
tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied. The light will not illuminate when the front pas-
senger seat is unoccupied. If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-
ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly. If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-
minate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status. For example, if a large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the ve-
hicle, the passenger air bag status light will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction. If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
, located in the meter and gauges area light of the instrument panel, will blink. Have the sys-
tem checked by a NISSAN dealer. Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions WARNING Do not place any objects on the steer-
ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such ob-
jects may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate. Do not place objects with sharp edges on the seat. Also, do not place heavy objects on the seat that will leave per-
manent impressions in the seat. Such objects can damage the seat or occu-
pant classification sensors (weight sen-
sors). This can affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury. Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classifica-
tion sensors. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury. 1-48 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 65 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing mate-
rial on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not specifi-
cally designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classifica-
tion sensor (weight sensor). No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in seri-
ous personal injury. Work on and around the front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unau-
thorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system. A cracked windshield should be re-
placed immediately by a qualified re-
pair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual. Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may se-
verely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, sus-
pension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system. Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system. Removing or modifying the front pas-
senger seat may affect the function of the air bag and result in serious per-
sonal injury. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 66 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-
tain side collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation. When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harm-
ful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-
dition should get fresh air promptly. LRS0259 FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-
IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails. These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occu-
pants. However, all of the information, cau-
tions and warnings in this manual still ap-
ply and must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in 1-50 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seat-
ing positions. They can help save lives and re-
duce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bags and curtain air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. The side air bags and curtain air bags op-
erate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. WARNING Do not place any objects near the seat-
back of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 67 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, sus-
pension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seat-
backs or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag. Work around and on the side air bag and curtain air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-
ing harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electri-
cal test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag system.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual. SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS (Front seats) WARNING The pretensioners cannot be reused af-
ter activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit. If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but a pretensioner is not acti-
vated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, re-
placed by your NISSAN dealer. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to pre-
vent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioners. Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury. Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system. If you need to dispose of a pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. Working with the seat belt retractor, the preten-
sioners help tighten the seat belt when the ve-
hicle becomes involved in certain types of colli-
sions, helping to restrain front seat occupants. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 68 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The pretensioners are part of the seat belt retrac-
tor assembly . These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts. When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest. The supplemental air bag warning light is used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner system.
(See SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT in this section for more de-
tails.) If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual. 1. SRS air bag warning labels (located on the sun visors) SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT LRS2163 LRS0100 SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front-
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration. air bag warning light, The supplemental in the instrument panel, moni-
displaying tors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten-
sioners and all related wiring. When the ignition is placed in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational. 1-52 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 69 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. If you need to dispose of a supplemen-
tal air bag or pretensioners or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incor-
rect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing:
The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer. WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-
sioner systems will not operate in an ac-
cident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. Repair and replacement procedure The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these supplemental air bag systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer. When maintenance work is required on the ve-
hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the mainte-
nance. The ignition should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle. WARNING Once a front air bag, side air bag, or curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, the ac-
tivated pretensioners must also be re-
placed. The air bag module and preten-
sioners should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and pretensioners cannot be repaired. SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 70 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 2 Instruments and controls Instrument panel. 2-2 Meters and gauges . 2-3 Speedometer and odometer . 2-4 Tachometer . 2-4 Engine coolant temperature gauge . 2-5 Fuel gauge . 2-5 Compass display (if so equipped) . 2-6 Compass display . 2-7 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . 2-10 Checking bulbs . 2-10 Warning lights . 2-10 Indicator lights . 2-14 Audible reminders . 2-16 Vehicle Information Display . 2-16 How to use the vehicle information display . 2-17 Startup display . 2-17 Settings . 2-17 Vehicle information display warnings and indicators. 2-23 Security systems . 2-26 Vehicle security system. 2-26 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . 2-27 Windshield wiper and washer switch . 2-28 Switch operation . 2-28 Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch . 2-29 Headlight and turn signal switch. 2-30 Xenon headlights (if so equipped) . 2-30 Headlight control switch. 2-30 Daytime running light system (Canada only) . 2-33 Instrument brightness control . 2-34 Turn signal switch . 2-34 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . 2-34 Hazard warning flasher switch . 2-35 Horn . 2-35 Heated seats (if so equipped). 2-36 Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) . 2-37 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch. 2-37 Power outlet . 2-38 Storage . 2-39 Map pockets . 2-39 Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . 2-39 Sunglasses holder . 2-39 Cup holders . 2-40 Glove box . 2-41 Console box . 2-41 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 71 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Grocery hooks . 2-42 Windows . 2-42 Power windows . 2-42 Moonroof (if so equipped) . 2-45 Automatic moonroof . 2-45 Interior light . 2-47 Console light (if so equipped). 2-47 Personal Lights. 2-48 Map lights . 2-48 Trunk light . 2-49 HomeLink universal transceiver (if so equipped). 2-49 Programming HomeLink. 2-50 Programming HomeLink for Canadian customers and gate openers. 2-51 Operating the HomeLink universal transceiver. 2-51 Programming trouble-diagnosis . 2-52 Clearing the programmed information . 2-52 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button . 2-52 If your vehicle is stolen . 2-52 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 72 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 INSTRUMENT PANEL 7. Windshield wiper/washer switch 8. 9.
(P. 2-28) Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-35) Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-45) 10. Audio system controls/Navigation system* (P. 4-30) 11. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-37) 12. Glove box (P. 2-41) 13. Aux jack (P. 4-41, 4-47, 4-54) 14. Power outlet/USB port (P.2-38, 4-54, 4-56) 15. Heater and air conditioner (manual or automatic) (P. 4-19, P. 4-27) 16. Shift selector (P. 5-13) 17. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-8) 18. Cruise control main/set switch/
Bluetooth Hands-free Phone System
(P.5-19 / P. 4-96, P. 4-70, P. 4-85 ) 1. 2. 3. Instrument brightness control/Trip com-
puter reset switch (P. 2-34, P. 2-4) Vents (P. 4-18) Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-30) 4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-37, P. 2-35) 5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3) 6. Paddle shift controls (if so equipped)
(P. 5-15)
(P. 3-32) 20. Steering wheel switch for audio control
/Vehicle information display controls
( P. 4-68, P. 2-17) 21. Fuel filler door release/Hood release)
(P. 3-30, P. 3-27) LIC2369 19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls 2-2 Instruments and controls REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 73 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 METERS AND GAUGES 22. Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF switch
(P. 2-37) Trunk opener (P. 3-27) Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-37)
* Refer to the Navigation System Owners manual
(if so equipped) See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details. Tachometer 1. 2. Warning/indicator lights 3. 4. 5. 6. Odometer/Twin trip odometer Vehicle Information Display Speedometer Fuel gauge 7. Engine coolant temperature gauge LIC2254 Instruments and controls 2-3 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 74 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Changing the display:
TACHOMETER LIC2218 LIC2234 LIC2219 Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. Odometer/Twin trip odometer The odometer 1 and the twin trip odometer 2 are displayed below the Vehicle Information Dis-
play when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The odometer records the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips. 2-4 Instruments and controls Pushing the TRIP RESET 3 switch on the left of the instrument panel to change the display as follows:
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into the red zone 1 . Trip Trip Trip Resetting the trip odometer:
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 3 for more than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero. Average fuel economy and distance to empty information is also available. See Vehicle Infor-
mation Display in this section. CAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-
gine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 75 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 LIC2220 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range 1 when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration. The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions. CAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is over-
heated, continued operation of the ve-
hicle may seriously damage the engine. See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section for immediate action required. LIC2222 FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-
ters 0 (Empty). Instruments and controls 2-5 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 76 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped) The located on the drivers side of the vehicle. indicates that the fuel-filler door is This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-
dicates the direction of the vehicles heading. CAUTION If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips. the light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the ve-
hicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL) later in this section. With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi-
button as described in the tion, press the chart below to activate various features of the automatic anti-glare rearview mirror. Push and hold the button for about:
1 second 5 seconds 9 seconds Feature:
(Push button again for about 1 sec-
ond to change settings) Compass display toggles on/off Compass zone can be changed to correct false compass readings Compass enters calibration mode For information about the automatic anti-glare feature, refer to Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror in the Pre-driving checks and adjust-
ments section. LIC1487 button for about 1 second when Press the the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to toggle the compass display 1 on or off. The display will indicate the direction of the vehicles heading. N: North E: East S: South W: West If the display reads C, calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 MPH (8 km/h). 2-6 Instruments and controls REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 77 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Once the desired zone number is displayed, stop pressing the button and the display will show compass direction within a few seconds. NOTE:
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii. You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-
pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles. COMPASS DISPLAY Press the button when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The direction will be displayed. Zone variation change procedure The difference between magnetic north and geo-
graphical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens:
1. Establish your location on the zone map. Refer to the illustration. Record your zone number. 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. 3. Press the button in for 5 seconds until the current zone entry number is displayed. 4. Press the button repeatedly until the desired zone entry number is displayed. Instruments and controls 2-7 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 78 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 If a magnet is located near the com-
pass or the vehicle is driven where the terrestrial magnetism is disturbed, the compass display may not indicate the correct direction. In places where the terrestrial magne-
tism is disturbed, the correction of the direction starts automatically. Inaccurate compass direction:
The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the correct direction is not shown, follow this procedure. 1. With the display turned on, press and hold switch for about 9 seconds. The the display will read C. 2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at a maximum speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h). 3. After completing the circles the display should return to normal. If the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment, have the compass checked at an authorized NISSAN dealer. 2-8 Instruments and controls WIC0355 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 79 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill. (The compass returns to the correct compass point when the ve-
hicle moves to an area where the geomag-
netism is stabilized.) CAUTION Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc., which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the op-
eration of the compass. When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing. Instruments and controls 2-9 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 80 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light Charge warning light Fog light indicator light (if so equipped) Side light and headlight indicator light (green) Low tire pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light Slip indicator light Master warning light High beam indicator light (blue) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights Power steering warning light Overdrive off indicator light (if so equipped) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light CHECKING BULBS With all doors closed, apply the parking brake and place the ignition switch to the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights will come on:
, or
, The following lights (if equipped) come on briefly and then go off:
, 2-10 Instruments and controls If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly. WARNING LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indi-
cators, see Vehicle information display later in this section. Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational. If the ABS light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the anti-lock braking sys-
tem is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 81 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-
tion is turned off. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See Brake system in the Starting and driving sec-
tion. or Brake warning light This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. Parking brake indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied. Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-
hicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See Brake fluid in the Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer. WARNING Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driv-
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driv-
ing it could be dangerous. Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping dis-
tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel. If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer. Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning indicator When the parking brake is released and the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake system checked, and if necessary, repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv-
ing and abrupt braking. (See Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light in this section.) Charge warning light If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not func-
tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. CAUTION Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable control sys-
tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. Refer to Variable voltage control system in the Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself section later in this manual. Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing. Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare. Instruments and controls 2-11 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 82 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly. After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off. Low tire pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning also appears in the vehicle information display. When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-
mended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire Load and Information label located in the drivers door opening. The low tire pres-
sure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recom-
mended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-
sure gauge to check the tire pressure. The Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning is active as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. 2-12 Instruments and controls For additional information, see Vehicle informa-
tion display in the Instruments and controls section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) in the Starting and driving section and in the In case of emergency section. TPMS malfunction:
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. The Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning does not appear if the low tire pres-
sure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction. information, see Tire Pressure For additional Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving section and Tire pressure in the Start-
ing and driving section. WARNING Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac-
turer for the possible influences before use. If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch in the ON position, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and in-
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-
rious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could re-
sult in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire placard located in the drivers door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. the light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 83 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. Master warning light When the ignition is in the ON position, the master warning light illuminates if any of the fol-
lowing are displayed on the vehicle information display. No key warning Low fuel warning Low windshield-washer fluid warning Parking brake release warning CAUTION Door/trunk open warning The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly. If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 25 km/h (16 MPH), the TPMS may not operate correctly. Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the 4 wheels correctly. Loose fuel cap Check tire pressure warning Power steering warning light When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the power steering warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning light turns off. This indi-
cates that the electric power steering system is operational. See Power steering system in the Starting and driving section. Seat belt warning light and chime The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the drivers seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the drivers seat belt is securely fastened. The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passengers seat belt is not fastened when the front passengers seat is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger. Refer to Seat belts in the SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system section for precautions on seat belt usage. Supplemental air bag warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational. Instruments and controls 2-13 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 84 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-
sioner systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:
The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-
tensioners may not function properly. For addi-
tional details, see Supplemental restraint sys-
tem in the SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual. WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems and/or pretensioner systems will not op-
erate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. 2-14 Instruments and controls INDICATOR LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indi-
cators, see Vehicle information display later in this section. Front passenger air bag status light
) The front passenger air bag status light (
will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used. For front passenger air bag status light operation, see Front passenger air bag and status light in the Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual. Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are ON. See Fog light switch later in this section. High beam indicator light
(blue) This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected. The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated. Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction. The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons
(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. After a few driving trips, the light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists. If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-
tem inspection/maintenance test. See Readi-
ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 85 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Operation The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in one of two ways:
Malfunction Indicator Light on steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the vehicle information display. If the fuel-
filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few light does not turn driving trips. If the off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. Malfunction Indicator Light blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To re-
duce or avoid emission control system dam-
age:
do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h). avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. avoid steep uphill grades. if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed. The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without hav-
ing the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission con-
trol system. Overdrive off indicator light (if so equipped) QR25DE:
The overdrive off indicator light illuminates when the overdrive off mode is selected. VQ35DE:
This light illuminates and then turns off when the ignition switch is placed to the ON position. QR25DE and VQ35DE:
For additional information, see Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Security indicator light This light blinks when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position. The blinking security indicator light indicates that the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational. For additional tems later in this section. information, see Security sys-
Side light and headlight indicator light (green) The side light and headlight indicator light illumi-
nates when the side light or headlight position is selected. See Headlight and turn signal switch later in this section for further details. Slip indicator light This indicator will blink when the VDC system or the traction control system is operating, thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The road surface may be slippery. Instruments and controls 2-15 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 86 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Turn signal/hazard indicator lights The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated. Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on. Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control has been turned off. Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will be reactivated. See Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system in the Starting and driving sec-
tion of this manual. The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on when you push the push-button ignition switch to the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the indi-
cator light while you are driving, have the Vehicle Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. 2-16 Instruments and controls VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal. AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard. Light reminder chime With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-
tion, a chime sounds when the drivers door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on. Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-
ing the vehicle. The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:
LIC2205 Vehicle settings Trip computer information Cruise control system information NISSAN Intelligent Key door buzzer NISSAN Intelligent Key operation information The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when locking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. See NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre-
driving checks and adjustments section. Audio information Navigation - turn by turn (if so equipped) Indicators and warnings Tire Pressure information (if so equipped) Other information REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 87 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 3. select/enter the Vehicle informa-
tion menu items or to change from one dis-
play screen to the next (i.e. trip, TPMS, Fuel economy) buttons also control audio The ENTER and and control panel functions. For additional infor-
mation see, Steering wheel switch for audio control in Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems section. STARTUP DISPLAY LIC2322 When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC position the screens that display in the vehicle information include:
Active system status (if so equipped) Trip computer Tire pressure information (if so equipped) Fuel economy Warnings Warnings will only display if there are any pres-
ent, for more information on warnings and indica-
tors see, Vehicle information display warnings and indicators in this section. To control what items display in the vehicle infor-
mation display, see Main menu selection in this section. HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY The vehicle information display can be changed and ENTER located on using the buttons the steering wheel. 1. navigate through the items in ve-
hicle information ENTER change or select an item in the vehicle information display 2. go back to the previous menu SETTINGS The setting mode allows you to change the infor-
mation displayed in the vehicle information display:
Main Menu Selection Body Color Maintenance Alarms Vehicle Settings Language Unit Welcome Effects Factory Reset Main Menu Selection The items that display can be enabled/disabled when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. To change the items that display. Use the button to change a menu item:
button to select and the ENTER Trip Computer Audio Navigation (if so equipped) Fuel Economy Tire Pressures (if so equipped) Instruments and controls 2-17 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 88 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Trip Computer Fuel Economy The trip computer can be enabled/disabled to display in the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The fuel economy can be enabled/disabled to display in the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. From the Main Menu Selection select Fuel Economy to display in the vehicle information display when the ignition is placed in the ON position. Tire Pressures (if so equipped) The tire pressures can be enabled/disabled to display in the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. From the Main Menu Selection select Tire Pressures to display in the vehicle information display when the ignition is placed in the ON position. Body Color The color of the vehicle that displays in the ve-
hicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position can be changed. From the Main Menu Selection select Trip Computer to display in the vehicle information display when the ignition is placed in the ON position. Audio The audio can be enabled/disabled to display in the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to display the radio information in the vehicle information dis-
play. From the Main Menu Selection select Audio to display in the vehicle information display when the ignition is placed in the ON position. Navigation (if so equipped) The navigation can be enabled/disabled to dis-
play in the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. From the Main Menu Selection select Naviga-
tion to display in the vehicle information display when turn-by-turn is used and the ignition is placed in the ON position. 2-18 Instruments and controls 1. scheduled service: oil and oil filter LIC2370 2. tires 3. other Maintenance The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts for the reminding of maintenance intervals. To change an item:
1. Press the button. 2. Use the button until Settings is se-
lected, and press ENTER. 3. Select Maintenance using the but-
tons and press ENTER. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 89 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Service This indicator appears when the customer set distance comes for changing the engine oil and filter. You can set or reset the distance for check-
ing or replacing these items. For scheduled main-
tenance items and intervals, see your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide. Tire This indicator appears when the customer set distance comes for replacing tires. You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires. WARNING Alarms The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, includ-
ing tire pressure checks. See Changing Wheels and Tires in Maintenance & Do-
It-Yourself section. Many factors includ-
ing tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replace-
ment indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to per-
form regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire fail-
ure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death. Other This indicator appears when the customer set distance comes for checking or replacing main-
tenance items other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire rotation. You can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing the items. This setting allows the customer to set alarms for outside temperature and a timer alert. 1. Press the button. 2. Use the button until Settings is se-
lected, and press ENTER. 3. Select Alarms using the buttons and press ENTER. Outside Temperature setting This to enable/disable the alert for low outside tempera-
ture in the vehicle information display. customer allows the 1. Use the buttons to select Outside Temperature. 2. Press the ENTER button to turn ON/OFF the outside temperature in the vehicle infor-
mation display. Timer Alert This setting allows the customer to set an alert to notify the driver that time has been reached. the set 1. Use the Alert. buttons to select Timer 2. Press the ENTER button. Instruments and controls 2-19 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 90 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 3. To change the timer amount, use the buttons and the ENTER button to save the selected time amount. Navigation (if so equipped) setting This to enable/disable the alert for navigation in the ve-
hicle information display. customer allows the 1. Use the buttons to select Naviga-
tion. 2. Press the ENTER button to turn ON/OFF the alert. Vehicle Settings The vehicle settings allows the customer to change settings for interior lights, intelligent key settings, unlock settings and other vehicle set-
tings. The vehicle settings can be changed using the
, and the ENTER buttons.
, Auto Room Lamp The interior lights can be set to be ON or OFF if any door is unlocked. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select Auto Room Light. Use the ENTER button to turn this feature ON or OFF. 2-20 Instruments and controls Light Sensitivity (if so equipped) The light sensitivity can be set to illuminate earlier based on the brightness outside the vehicle. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select Light Sensitivity. Use the ENTER button to change the sensitivity. Light Off Delay (if so equipped) The duration of the automatic headlights can be changed from 0 to 180 seconds. From the Ve-
hicle Settings menu, select Light Off Delay. Use the ENTER button to change the duration. Wiper with Speed The wiper with speed can be set to be ON or OFF. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select Wiper with Speed. Use the ENTER button to turn this feature ON or OFF. I-Key Door Lock (if so equipped) When this item is turned on, the request switch on the door is activated. From the Vehicle Set-
tings menu, select I-Key Door Unlock. Use the ENTER button to activate this function. Selective-Unlock When this item is turned on, only the drivers door is unlocked first after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the drivers or front passengers side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute. When this item is turned to off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select Selective Unlock. Use the ENTER button to activate this function. Auto Door Unlock The auto door unlock function automatically un-
locks all the doors when the shift selector is placed in P (park) position. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select Auto Door Unlock. Use the ENTER button to enable/disable this func-
tion. Answer back horn When the answer back horn is on the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key. Remote Start (if so equipped) The remote start function can be turned on or off. If the setting is OFF the vehicle cannot be started using the intelligent key. From the Vehicle Set-
tings menu, select Remote Start. Use the EN-
TER button to enable/disable. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 91 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Battery Saver Units Tire Pressures (if so equipped) Activating the battery saver will automatically turn off the headlights after a period of time when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position when the headlight switch is in the
, or position. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select Battery Saver. Use the ENTER button to enable/disable this function. Language The language of the vehicle information display can be changed to:
US English French Spanish
, and the ENTER buttons to Use the select and change the language of the vehicle information display. The language of the center display/navigation can be changed indepen-
dently of the vehicle information display. For ve-
hicles not equipped with Navigation see SET-
TING button: and vehicles equipped with Navigation see, System in the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems section of this manual. The units that are shown in the vehicle informa-
tion display can be changed:
The unit for tire pressure that displays in the vehicle information display can be changed to:
Mileage Tire pressures Temperature
, Use the
, and the ENTER buttons to select and change the units of the vehicle infor-
mation display. The units of the navigation screen can be changed independently of the vehicle information display. For vehicles equipped with Navigation, see System in the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems section of this manual. Mileage The unit for the mileage that displays in the ve-
hicle information display can be changed to:
miles, MPG, Inch km/h, l/100km, cm Use the and change the unit. and the ENTER buttons to select psi kPa bar Kgf/cm2 Use the and change the unit. and the ENTER buttons to select Temperature The temperature that displays in the vehicle infor-
mation display can be changed from:
F (Fahrenheit) C (Celsius) Use the ENTER button to toggle choices. Welcome Effects The welcome screen display can be turned ON/OFF to display when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position. To enable/disable the welcome screen:
1. Press the button. Instruments and controls 2-21 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 92 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 2. Use the buttons to select Settings, and press ENTER. 3. Select Welcome Effects using the buttons and press ENTER to turn this func-
tion ON or OFF. Factory Reset The settings in the vehicle information display can be reset back to the factory default. To reset the vehicle information display:
1. Press the button. 2. Use the buttons to select Settings, and press the ENTER button. 3. Select Factory Reset using the but-
tons and press the ENTER button. 4. Select YES to return all settings back to default by pressing the ENTER button. 2-22 Instruments and controls REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 93 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS 4. Push ignition to OFF 5. Key Battery Low 8. Low Fuel 9. Low Washer Fluid 1. No Key Detected 2. Key ID Incorrect 3. Shift to Park 6. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key sys-
10. Door Open tem 7. Release parking brake 11. Trunk Open LIC2343 Instruments and controls 2-23 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 94 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 12. Timer Alert Time for a driver break?
Shift to Park 13. Low Outside Temperature 14. Power will turn off to save the battery 15. CVT Error 16. Reminder: Turn OFF headlights 17. Low Oil Pressure 18. Key Registration Complete 19. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air (if so equipped) 20. TPMS Error This warning illuminates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the shift selector is in any position other than P (Park) position. Also, a chime sounds when the ignition switch is in the OFF position. If this warning illuminates, move the shift selector to the P (Park) position or start the engine. For additional information about Intelligent Key, see NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section. 21. Remote Start (if so equipped) Push ignition to OFF 22. Loose Fuel Cap No Key Detected This warning appears when the intelligent key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch is the ON or ACC position. Make sure the Intelli-
gent Key is inside the vehicle. After the Push ignition to OFF warning illumi-
nates, the warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC position when the shift selector is moved to the P (Park) position. To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK position. Key ID Incorrect Key Battery Low This warning appears when the ignition switch is placed from the OFF position and the intelligent key is not recognized by the system. You can not start the engine with an unregistered key. See NISSAN Intelligent Key in Pre-driving checks and adjustments for more information. 2-24 Instruments and controls This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power. If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery with a new one. See Battery replacement in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system This indicator appears when the battery of the Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key system and the vehicle are not communicating normally. If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal. For more information see, Intelligent Key battery discharge in the Starting and driving section. Release Parking brake This warning illuminates in the message area of the vehicle information display when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven. Low Fuel This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small re-
serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty). Low Washer Fluid This warning illuminates when the windshield-
washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-
washer fluid as necessary. See Windshield-
washer fluid in the Maintenance and do-it-
yourself section of this manual. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 95 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Door Open Reminder: Turn OFF headlights This warning illuminates when a door has been opened when the engine is running. Trunk Open This warning illuminates when the trunk has been opened when the engine is running. Timer Alert Time for a driver break?
This indicator appears when the set time is reached. The time can be set up to 6 hours. For setting the timer see, Timer alert in this section. Low Outside Temperature This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 37F (3C). The temperature can be changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit, see Temperature earlier in this section. Power will turn off to save the battery This warning appears in message area of the vehicle information display after a period of time if the shift selector has not moved from the P (Park) position. CVT Error This warning illuminates when the there is a prob-
lem with the CVT system. If this warning comes on, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. This warning appears when the headlights are left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle. Place the headlight switch to OFF or AUTO po-
sition. For additional information, see Headlight and turn signal switch in this section. Low Oil Pressure This warning appears in message area of the vehicle information display if low oil pressure is detected. This gauge is not designed to indicated low oil level. The low oil pressure warning is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See Engine oil in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section. Intelligent key registration complete This appears when a new intelligent key is regis-
tered to the vehicle. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning (if so equipped) This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all 4 tires to the recommended COLD tire pres-
sure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Low tire pressure warning light ear-
lier in this section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving section. TPMS Error This warning appears when there is a error with your TPMS. If this warning comes on, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. Push to start (if so equipped) This warning appears in the vehicle information display when the vehicle has been started using the remote start function. To start the vehicle, apply the brake and place the ignition switch in the ON position. Loose Fuel Cap This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. See Fuel-filler cap in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section of this manual. Instruments and controls 2-25 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 96 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 SECURITY SYSTEMS exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-
ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key in the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features. Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-
tems:
LIC0301 How to arm the vehicle security system Vehicle security system NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors, trunk lid or the hood when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs. The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or 2-26 Instruments and controls 1. Close all windows. (The system can be armed even if the windows are open.) 2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle. 3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the Intelligent Key, door handle request switch
(if so equipped), power door lock switch or mechanical key. 4. Confirm that the security indicator light comes on. The security light stays on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys-
tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-
onds the vehicle security system automati-
cally shifts into the armed phase. The security light begins to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm time period, the drivers door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob, or the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position, the sys-
tem will not arm. Even when the driver and/or passen-
gers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all the doors, hood and trunk lid locked with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position. When placing the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, the system will be released. Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:
The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently. The alarm automatically turns off after a pe-
riod of time. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the drivers door or trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the button on the Intelligent Key. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 97 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The alarm is activated by:
opening the door or trunk lid without using the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock switch). How to stop an activated alarm The alarm stops only by unlocking the drivers door or the trunk lid with the key, pressing button on the Intelligent Key, or press-
the ing the request switch (if so equipped) on the drivers or passengers door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. Statement related to Section 15 of FCC Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-
ing two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-
terference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device. CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-
SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USERS AUTHORITY TO OPER-
ATE THE EQUIPMENT. LIC0474 Security indicator light The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-
hicle Immobilizer System is operational. If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-
functioning, the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. If the light still remains on and/or the en-
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service. Instruments and controls 2-27 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 98 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
tion may freeze on the window and ob-
scure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the window with the de-
froster before you wash the window. If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that is on and around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper. CAUTION Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds. Do not operate the washer if the reser-
voir tank is empty. Do not fill the window washer reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may perma-
nently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir. Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recom-
mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir. Do not use the window washer reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water. 2-28 Instruments and controls WIC1434 SWITCH OPERATION The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:
1 Intermittent (INT) intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward A (Slower) or B (Faster). Also, the inter-
mittent operation speed varies in accor-
dance with the vehicle speed. (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-
tent operation speed will be faster.) REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 99 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFROSTER SWITCH 2 Low (LO) continuous low speed operation 3 High (HI) continuous high speed opera-
tion Push the lever up 4 to have one sweep opera-
tion (MIST) of the wiper. Pull the lever toward you 5 to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times. Type A Type B LIC2324 LIC2325 To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off. indicator The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes. CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or dam-
age the rear window defroster. NOTE:
The top and bottom few rows of wires on the rear window are not part of the rear window defroster system. These wires make up the antenna for the audio system. Instruments and controls 2-29 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 100 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on-off opera-
tion. It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals
(for example, when the vehicle stops at a traffic signal). Even when the daytime running lights are active (Canada only), the xenon headlights do not turn on. This way the life of the xenon head-
lights is not reduced. If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burning out, the brightness will drasti-
cally decrease, the light will start blink-
ing, or the color of the light will be-
come reddish. If one or more of the above signs appear, contact a NISSAN dealer. HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Type A WIC1435 HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so equipped) WARNING cHIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xe-
non headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. Xenon headlights provide considerably more light than conventional head-
lights. If they are not correctly aimed, they might temporarily blind an oncom-
ing driver or the driver ahead of you and cause a serious accident. If headlights are not aimed correctly, immediately take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly. When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its brightness or color varies slightly. However, the color and brightness will soon stabilize. 2-30 Instruments and controls REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 101 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CAUTION Use the headlights with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. Type B Type C WIC1436 WIC1510 Lighting 1 When turning the switch to the posi-
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights come on. 2 When turning the switch to the posi-
tion, the headlights come on and all the other lights remain on. Instruments and controls 2-31 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 102 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be ad-
justed. See Vehicle information display in this section. To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
tion 1 . 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off. Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain ON for a period of time. If another door is opened while the headlights are on, then the timer is reset. To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to the OFF, position.
, or LIC2318 Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located in the top side of the instrument panel. The autolight sen-
sor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position, your vehicles battery could be-
come discharged. LIC2351 Autolight system (if so equipped) The autolight system allows the headlights to turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can:
Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights au-
tomatically when it is dark. Turn off all the lights when it is light. Keep all the lights on for a period of time after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed. 2-32 Instruments and controls REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 103 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CAUTION WARNING When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. Even though the battery saver feature au-
tomatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the head-
light switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(Canada only) The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-
duced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the position. Turn the OFF position or in the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-
nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. WIC1438 Headlight beam select 1 To select the high beam function, push the lever forward. The high beam lights come on and the light illuminates. 2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam. 3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off. Battery saver system If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is in the or a period of time. position, the headlights will turn off after Instruments and controls 2-33 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 104 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 LIC2305 INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL Push the + button A to increase the bright-
ness of instrument panel lights when driving at night. Push the - button B to decrease the bright-
ness of instrument panel lights when driving at night. 2-34 Instruments and controls TURN SIGNAL SWITCH WIC1439 WIC1440 FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) Turn signal 1 Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is com-
pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically. Lane change signal 2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash, but the lever does not latch. To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch position, then turn the fog light to the switch to the position. To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to the position. To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position. The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 105 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH HORN The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position. Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving. Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi-
tions. All turn signal lights flash. LIC0394 WARNING If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road. Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. Turn signals do not work when the haz-
ard warning flasher lights are on. To sound the horn, push near the horn icon of the steering wheel. LIC2319 WARNING Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tam-
pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Instruments and controls 2-35 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 106 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 HEATED SEATS (if so equipped) The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. 1. Start the engine. 2. Push the low or high position of the switch, as desired, depending on the temperature. The indicator light in the switch will illumi-
nate. The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. 3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off. LIC1543 WARNING Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in se-
rious injury. CAUTION Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated. Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater. Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth. When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-
lar materials. If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running. 2-36 Instruments and controls REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 107 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped) VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH NOTE:
The heated steering wheel switch is equipped with a 30 minute timer. After the switch has been activate for 30 minutes, the system will automatically turn off. If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68F (20C) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction. LIC0421 The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below approximately 68F
(20C). Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator light will come on. If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68F (20C), the system will heat the steering wheel to approximately 86F (30C), then turn off automatically. Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel off manually. The indicator light will go off. LIC2315 The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-
ing conditions. If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off. To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF switch. The Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. See Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) system in the Starting and driving section. indicator will come on. Instruments and controls 2-37 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 108 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 POWER OUTLET LIC2306 LIC2307 Instrument panel The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. The power outlets are powered only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Open the lower half of the console box to access the power outlet. Refer to Console box in this section. 2-38 Instruments and controls Console box CAUTION The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. See your NISSAN dealer for additional information. Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. Use power outlets with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on. Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF. Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open. When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 109 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 STORAGE MAP POCKETS LIC2308 LIC0016 LIC2312 SEATBACK POCKETS (if so equipped) The seatback pockets are located on the back of the drivers (if so equipped) and passengers seats. The pockets can be used to store maps. SUNGLASSES HOLDER To open the sunglasses holder, push and release. Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder. WARNING Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident. Instruments and controls 2-39 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 110 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CAUTION Do not use for anything other than sunglasses. Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses. 2-40 Instruments and controls CUP HOLDERS Front LIC2298 LIC2297 Rear The rear center cup holders are located in the rear fold-down armrest. CAUTION Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 111 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 LIC2296 LIC2300 WIC1120 Soft bottle holder Soft bottle holder CAUTION Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident. Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers. GLOVE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the master key when locking 1 or unlocking 2 the glove box. WARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop. CONSOLE BOX Upper half Pull up on the drivers side latch to open the upper half of the console box. The upper half of the console box may be used for storage of cellular phones. An access hole is provided at the front of the upper half of the console box for phone cord routing to the power outlet. Instruments and controls 2-41 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 112 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS WARNING Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls and become trapped in a window. Unattended chil-
dren could become involved in serious accidents. The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the drivers or passengers door is opened during this period of time, the power to the windows is canceled. WIC1121 LIC2362 Lower half GROCERY HOOKS Pull up on the passengers side latch to open the lower half of the console box. A power outlet is located inside the console box. The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and can be used to hang a standard size plastic grocery bag. CAUTION Do not apply a total load of more than 20 lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook. 2-42 Instruments and controls REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 113 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Drivers side power window switch The drivers side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows. To open a window, push the switch to the first detent and continue to hold down until the de-
sired window position is reached. To close a window, pull the switch to the first detent and continue to hold up until the desired window position is reached. LIC2299 1. Window lock button 2. 3. Power door lock switch Front passenger side (automatic opera-
tion if so equipped) Right rear passenger side Left rear passenger side Driver side automatic switch 4. 5. 6. WIC1129 Front passengers power window switch The passengers window switch operates only the corresponding passengers window. To open the window, push the switch to the first detent and continue to hold it down until the desired window position is reached 1 . To close the window, pull the switch to the first detent and continue to hold it up until the desired window position is reached 2 . Instruments and controls 2-43 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 114 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Auto-reverse function If the control unit detects something caught in the window as it is closing, the window will be imme-
diately lowered. The auto-reverse function can be activated when the window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window oc-
curs. WARNING There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window. When the automatic operation for the power window switch does not operate If the automatic operation does not operate prop-
erly, perform the following procedure to initialize the power window switch. Rear power window switch Automatic operation LIC2311 LIC0410 The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows. To open the window, push the switch and hold it down 1 . To close the window, pull the switch up 2 . Locking passengers windows When the window lock button is depressed, only the drivers side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function. To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, press the window switch down (only drivers side shown) to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window auto-
matically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening. To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. To stop the window, press the switch down while the window is closing. 2-44 Instruments and controls REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 115 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. 2. Press and hold the drivers window switch down until the window opens completely. 3. Release the switch. 4. Pull and hold the drivers window switch up to the second detent until the window glass has reached the full close position. Con-
tinue to hold the window switch in the up position for 5 seconds after the win-
dow glass has reached the full close position. (It is necessary for this entire step to be completed with one continuous pull of the window switch.) 5. Release the switch. Initialization is now complete. The automatic op-
eration for the power window switch should now operate. If the automatic operation does not operate prop-
erly after performing the above procedure, see a NISSAN dealer for assistance. No initialization is required for all the other win-
dow switches. MOONROOF (if so equipped) automatically open or close all the way. To stop the roof, push the switch once more while it is opening or closing. Tilting the moonroof To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push the switch to the tilt up position 1 and release it; it need not be held. To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch to the tilt down position 2 . Resetting the moonroof switch If the moonroof does not operate properly, per-
form the following procedure to initialize the moonroof operation system. LIC2313 AUTOMATIC MOONROOF The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The auto-
matic moonroof is operational for a period of time, even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position. If the drivers door or the front passengers door is opened during this period of time, the power to the moonroof is canceled. Sliding the moonroof To fully open or close the moonroof, push the switch to the open 2 or close 1 position and release it; it need not be held. The roof will 1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by repeatedly pushing the moonroof switch to the close position 1 to tilt the moonroof up. 2. Push and hold the switch to the close posi-
tion 1 . 3. Release the moonroof switch after moonroof moves slightly up and down. the 4. Push and hold the switch to the open posi-
tion 2 to fully tilt the moonroof down. 5. Check if the moonroof switch operates nor-
mally. Instruments and controls 2-45 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 116 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 If the moonroof does not operate properly after performing the procedure above, have your ve-
hicle checked by an NISSAN dealer. Auto-reverse function (when closing or tilting down the moonroof) The auto-reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-
matic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs. WARNING There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof. When closing:
If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof will immediately open backward. 2-46 Instruments and controls When tilting down:
Sunshade Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-
ward or backward. If the moonroof does not close Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the moonroof. If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-
mediately tilt up. If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-
peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens; the moonroof will fully close gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof. WARNING In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints. Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing. CAUTION Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the moonroof before opening. Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 117 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 INTERIOR LIGHT 1 The interior light can be turned ON regard-
less of door position. The light will go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position when any door is opened. 2 The interior lights can be set to operate when the doors are opened. To turn off the interior lights when a door open, push the switch, the interior lights will not illuminate, regardless of door position. The lights will go off when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or the drivers door is closed and locked. The lights will also go off after a period of time when the doors are open. NOTE:
The step lights illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are opened regard-
less of the interior light switch position. These lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming dis-
charged. CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. LIC2302 LIC2303 CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped) The console light will turn on whenever the park-
ing lights or headlights are illuminated. Instruments and controls 2-47 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 118 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 PERSONAL LIGHTS MAP LIGHTS To turn the rear personal lights on, press the switch. To turn them off, press the switch again. Rear personal lights LIC1083 2-48 Instruments and controls LIC2304 Push the button to turn the map lights on. To turn them off, press the button again. CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 119 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 TRUNK LIGHT The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off. The light will go off after a period of time if the trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. For bulb replacement procedures, refer to Exte-
rior and interior lights in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual. HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped) The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device. HomeLink Universal Transceiver:
Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and se-
curity systems. Is powered by your vehicles battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehi-
cles battery is discharged or is discon-
nected, HomeLink will retain all program-
ming. When the HomeLink Universal Trans-
ceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming proce-
dures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to Program-
ming HomeLink later in this section. WARNING Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re-
verse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards be-
came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-
rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features in-
creases the risk of serious injury or death. During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming. Your vehicles engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. Instruments and controls 2-49 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 120 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 PROGRAMMING HOMELINK If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons, refer to the HomeLink web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. NOTE:
device It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the to HomeLink for quicker programming and accurate radio-
frequency. transmission of programmed being the 1. Position the end of your hand-held transmit-
ter 13 inches (514 cm) away from the HomeLink surface, keeping the HomeLink indicator light 1 in view. 2-50 Instruments and controls LIC2365 LIC2366 2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink button and handheld transmitter button. DO NOT re-
lease until the HomeLink indicator light 1 flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. (The rapid flashing indi-
cates successful programming.) NOTE:
Some devices may require you to replace Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in the Programing HomeLink for Canadian customers and gate openers section. 3. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink the indicator button and observe the indicator light. light 1 If is solid/continuous, programming is complete and your device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released. If the indicator light 1 blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a solid/continuous continue with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A second person may make the following steps easier. Use a ladder or other device. Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the next steps. light, REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 121 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 in the garage, 4. At the receiver located on the garage door opener motor locate the learn or smart button (the name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer but it is usually located near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there is difficulty locating the button, reference the garage door openers manual. 5. Press and release the learn or smart but-
ton. and 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold the trained HomeLink button for two seconds the press/hold/release sequence up to 3 times to complete the training process. HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device. release. Repeat 7. If you have any questions or are having diffi-
culty programming your HomeLink buttons, refer to the HomeLink web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515. PROGRAMMING HOMELINK FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE OPENERS Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmit-
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during training. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to tim-
eout in the same manner. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties training a gate operator or garage door opener by using the Training procedures, replace Programming HomeLink Step 2 with the fol-
lowing:
NOTE:
When programming a garage door opener, etc., unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components. 1. See Programing HomeLink step 1 earlier in this section. 2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the hand-held transmitter button. During train-
ing, your hand-held transmitter may auto-
matically stop transmitting. Continue to press and hold the desired HomeLink but-
ton while you press and re-press (cycle) your hand-held transmitter every two sec-
onds until the frequency signal has been learned. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training. DO NOT release until the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing indi-
cates successful training. Proceed with Programming HomeLink step 3 to complete. If the device was unplugged during the pro-
gramming procedure, remember to plug it back in when programming is completed. OPERATING THE HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink Universal Transceiver, after it is programmed, can be used to activate the pro-
grammed device. To operate, simply press and release the appropriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button. The amber indica-
tor light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted. For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. Instruments and controls 2-51 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 122 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-
DIAGNOSIS CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand-
held transmitter information:
replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries. position the hand-held transmitter with its from the facing away battery HomeLink surface. area press and hold both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-
ruption. position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons, refer to the HomeLink web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. 2-52 Instruments and controls The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons. Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed, see Reprogramming a single HomeLink button in this section. To clear all programming:
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. 2. Release both buttons. HomeLink is now in the programming mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Programming HomeLink - Step 1. REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transceiver button, complete the following:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but-
ton. DO NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, Programming HomeLink - Step 1. proceed with For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 18003553515. The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons. IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink. Consult the Owners Manual of each device or call the manu-
facturer or dealer of those devices for additional information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer-
sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 123 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. For Canada:
This device complies with RSS-210 of In-
dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, in-
cluding interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device. Instruments and controls 2-53 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 124 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 MEMO 2-54 Instruments and controls REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 125 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Keys . 3-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key . 3-2 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . 3-3 Doors . 3-4 Locking with key. 3-4 Locking with inside lock knob . 3-5 Locking with power door lock switch . 3-5 Automatic door locks . 3-5 Child safety rear door lock . 3-6 NISSAN Intelligent Key With Door and Trunk Request Switches . 3-6 Operating range. 3-8 Door locks/unlocks precaution . 3-9 NISSAN Intelligent Key operation . 3-9 How to use the remote keyless entry function . 3-13 Warning signals . 3-16 Troubleshooting guide . 3-16 NISSAN Intelligent Key Without Door and Trunk Request Switches . 3-18 Operating range. 3-19 How to use the remote keyless entry function . 3-19 Warning signals . 3-23 Troubleshooting guide . 3-24 Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . 3-25 Remote engine start operating range . 3-25 Remote starting the vehicle . 3-25 Extending engine run time . 3-26 Canceling a remote start . 3-26 Conditions the remote start will not work . 3-26 Hood . 3-27 Trunk lid . 3-27 Opener operation. 3-28 Interior trunk lid release . 3-29 Fuel-filler door . 3-30 Opener operation. 3-30 Fuel-filler cap . 3-30 Tilt/telescopic steering . 3-32 Tilt operation . 3-32 Telescopic operation . 3-32 Sun visors . 3-32 Vanity mirrors . 3-33 Mirrors . 3-33 Rearview mirror (if so equipped). 3-33 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . 3-34 Outside mirrors . 3-35 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 126 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 KEYS Do not drop the Intelligent Key. Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object. Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key. Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely dry. Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140F (60C). WPD0427 Type A Type B LPD2052 Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet. Intelligent Key (2 sets) 1. 2. Mechanical key 3. NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY Key number plate (1 plate) Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicles Intel-
ligent Key system components and NISSAN Ve-
hicle Immobilizer System components. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be regis-
tered by an NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Im-
mobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the reg-
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments istration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer. CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key:
Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function. Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers. If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, contact an NISSAN dealer. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 127 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CAUTION Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot. Valet hand-off When you have to leave a key with a valet, give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-
chanical key with you to protect your belongings. To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being opened during valet hand-off, follow the proce-
dures below:
1. Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFF SPA1951 position. Mechanical key The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key. To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key. To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position. Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors, glove box and rear seatback lock. See Doors in this section, Storage in the Instruments and controls section, and Seats in the Safety Seats, seat belts and supple-
mental restraint system section of this manual. 2. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-
gent Key. 3. Lock the glove box and the rear seats with the mechanical key. 4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and keep the mechanical key with you. See Storage in the Instruments and controls section and Seats in the Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system section. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS You can only drive your vehicle using the master keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle. The master key can be used for all the locks. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-
cate your existing key. This is because the regis-
tration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Ve-
hicle Immobilizer System. Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 128 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 DOORS When the doors are locked using one of the following methods, the doors can not be opened using the inside or outside door handles. The doors must be unlocked to open the doors. WARNING Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally open-
ing the doors, and will help keep out intruders. Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents. 3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Opening and closing windows (if so equipped) The drivers door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with auto-
matic operation at the same time. To open the windows, turn the drivers door key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked. To close the windows, turn the drivers door key toward the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked. LPD0461 Windows stop when the key cylinder is released. Drivers side LOCKING WITH KEY The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time. Turning the key toward the front 1 of the vehicle locks all doors. Turning the key one time toward the rear 2 of the vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, returning the key to neutral 3 (where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors 4 . REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 129 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Lockout protection When the power door lock switch is moved to the lock position and any door is open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically. With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle and any door is open, all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is closed. These functions help to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle. AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS LPD2092 Inside lock LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the lock position 1 , then close the door. To unlock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position 2 . Door lock switch speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h). LPD2093 All doors lock automatically when the vehicle LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (drivers or front passengers side) to the lock position 1 . When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle. To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (drivers or front passengers side) to the unlock position 2 . All doors unlock automatically when the ig-
nition is placed in the OFF position. The automatic unlock function can be de-
activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-
vate the automatic door unlock system, perform the following procedure:
1. Close all doors. 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. 3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2, push and hold the power door lock switch to position (UNLOCK) for more than the 5 seconds. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 130 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 4. When activated, the hazard indicator will flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard indicator will flash once. 5. The ignition switch must be placed in the OFF and ON position again between each setting change. When the automatic door unlock system is deac-
tivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. To unlock the door manually, use the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch (drivers or front passen-
gers side). NOTE:
The automatic door unlock function can be changed using the Vehicle Settings in the vehicle information display. The Auto Door Unlock choices are:
Off IGN OFF Shift into P 3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments SPA2037 CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle. The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors. When the lever is in the unlock position 2 , the door can be opened from the outside or the inside. When the lever is in the LOCK position 1 , the door can be opened only from the out-
side. NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY WITH DOOR AND TRUNK REQUEST SWITCHES WARNING Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac-
turer for the possible influences before use. The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communi-
cation systems. Do not operate the In-
telligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unin-
tentionally when the unit is stored for a flight. The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks using the remote controller function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key operation. Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 131 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CAUTION Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle. Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-
ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-
mental conditions may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Intelligent Key under the following operating conditions:
When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station. When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, and CB radio. When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials. When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby. When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal com-
puter. When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter. In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key. Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the batterys life is approximately 2 years. the battery is dis-
charged, replace it with a new one. If When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an indi-
cator illuminates in the Vehicle Information Dis-
play. See Vehicle Information Display in the Instruments and controls section. Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-
nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-
tery life may become shorter. For information regarding replacement of a bat-
tery, see Battery replacement in the Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself section. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer. CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelligent Key:
Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function. Do not drop the Intelligent Key. Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object. Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key. Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely dry. Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140F (60C). Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet. Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 132 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-
gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer. When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operat-
ing location, the Intelligent Key systems operat-
ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly. The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm) from each request switch 1 . If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the request switches may not function. When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the request switch to lock/unlock the doors. LPD2073 OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch 1 . 3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 133 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors. Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door. WPD0375 DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-
gent Key is outside the vehicle. After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them. LPD2074 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the key out of your pocket or bag. When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle request switch within the range of opera-
tion. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 134 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you. However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with an-
other Intelligent Key. CAUTION After locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handle or the trunk opener switch. When locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession be-
fore operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle. The request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been de-
tected by the Intelligent Key system. Locking doors NOTE:
LPD2075 WPD0369 1. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
tion, place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and make sure you carry the Intelli-
gent Key with you. 2. Close all doors. 3. Push any door handle request switch 1 while carrying the Intelligent Key with you. 4. All doors and the trunk will lock. 5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the outside buzzer sounds twice. 3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Request switches for all doors and trunk can be deactivated when the I-Key Door Lock setting is switched to OFF in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. See Vehicle information display in the In-
struments and controls section. Doors lock with the door handle request switch while the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position. Doors do not lock by pushing the door handle request switch while any door is open. However, doors lock with the me-
chanical key even if any door is open. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 135 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Lockout protection To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-
dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key. When the drivers side door is open, the doors are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds. NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelli-
gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-
ating the request switch to lock the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other hand. CAUTION The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions:
When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel. When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the rear parcel shelf. When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the glove box or a storage bin. When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the door pockets. When the Intelligent Key is placed on or under the spare tire area. When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side or near metallic materials. LPD2075 Unlocking doors 1. Carry the Intelligent Key. 2. Push the door handle request switch 1 . 3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the outside buzzer sounds once. 4. Push the door handle request switch 1 again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors. If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door. If the door does not unlock after return-
ing the door handle, push the door handle re-
quest switch to unlock the door. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 136 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Locking the doors with the remote controller. Switching the room light switch to the OFF position. All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch:
WPD0369 Opening any door. Pushing the ignition switch. The interior light timer illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position. The interior light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations:
Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion. 3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments LPD2077 Opening the trunk lid 1. Push the trunk opener request switch A for more than 1 second while carrying the Intel-
ligent Key with you. 2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound 4 times. 3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk. Lockout protection To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-
dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 137 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CAUTION After locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk, the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will open. HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance de-
pends upon the conditions around the vehicle. The remote keyless entry function will not func-
tion under the following conditions:
When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range. When the doors or the trunk are open or not closed securely. When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged. CAUTION When locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle. Locking doors 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
WPD0359 tion. 2. Close all doors. 3. Press the button on the Intelligent Key. 4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once. 5. All doors will be locked. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 138 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pressing the button:
Opening any doors. Pushing the ignition switch. The interior light illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position. The light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations:
Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
Opening windows The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously open windows equipped with automatic opera-
tion. To open the windows, press the but-
ton on the Intelligent Key for longer than 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked. The door windows will open while pressing the button on the Intelligent Key. The door windows cannot be closed by using the Intelligent Key. WPD0360 tion. Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key. Switching the room light switch to the OFF position. Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. See Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section. Unlocking doors 1. Press the Key. button on the Intelligent 2. The hazard warning lights flash once. 3. Press the button again within 5 sec-
onds to unlock all doors. NOTE:
The unlocking operation can be changed in Selective door unlock in the Vehicle Set-
tings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, see Vehicle infor-
mation display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual. 3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 139 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Releasing the trunk lid Using the panic alarm Answer back horn feature WPD0364 WPD0361 WPD0362 button for longer than 0.5 sec-
Press the onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release button will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position or when the trunk cancel switch is in the OFF position. See Cancel switch in this section. If desired, the answer back horn feature can be deactivated using the Intelligent Key. When de-
button is activated and the LOCK pushed the hazard indicator flashes twice and when the UNLOCK button is pushed, nei-
ther the hazard indicator nor the horn operates. If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention button on the by pressing and holding the Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds. The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time. The panic alarm stops when:
It has run for a period of time, or Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key. The request switch on the driver or passen-
ger door has been pushed and the Intelligent Key is in range of the door handle. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 140 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 NOTE:
WARNING SIGNALS TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected. To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-
pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel. When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. See the Troubleshooting guide that follows and Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual. If you change the answer back horn and light flash feature with the Intelligent Key, the vehicle information display screen will show the current mode after the ignition switch has been cycled from the OFF to the ON position. The vehicle information dis-
play screen can also be used to change the answer back horn mode. See Answer back horn in the Instruments and controls section. To deactivate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds. The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to confirm that the answer back horn feature has been deactivated. To activate: Press and hold the and once more. buttons for at least 2 seconds The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated. Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered. 3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 141 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Symptom Possible Cause Remedy When stopping the engine When opening the drivers door to get out of the vehicle When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle When closing the door with the inside lock knob turned to LOCK When pushing the door handle request switch or the LOCK button on the Intelli-
gent Key to lock the door When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine When pushing the ignition switch The Shift to Park warning appears in the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously. The Door Open warning appears in the dis-
play and the inside warning chime sounds continuously. The No Key Detected warning appears in the display, the outside chime sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds. The Shift to Park warning appears in the display and the outside chime sounds continuously. The outside chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds and all the doors unlock. The outside chime sounds for approximately 2 seconds. The shift selector is not in the P (Park) position. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position. The ignition switch is in the ACC position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. The ignition switch is in the ACC position and the shift selector is not in the P (Park) position. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
tion and place the ignition switch in the OFF position. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. The Key low battery indicator appears in the display. The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. (See Battery in the Maintenance and do-it-
yourself section.) The KEY ID Incorrect warning appears i n the display, the outside chime sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds. The Intelligent Key system warning light in the meter illuminates in yellow. The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. Contact a NISSAN dealer. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 142 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY WITHOUT DOOR AND TRUNK REQUEST SWITCHES WARNING Radio waves could adversely affect elec-
tric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communi-
cation systems. Do not operate the In-
telligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unin-
tentionally when the unit is stored for a flight. The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks using the remote controller function. The operat-
ing environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key operation. Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key. CAUTION Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle. Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. 3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-
ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-
mental conditions may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Intelligent Key under the following operating conditions:
When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station. When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, and CB radio. When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials. When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby. When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal com-
puter. When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter. In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key. Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the batterys life is approximately 2 years. the battery is dis-
charged, replace it with a new one. If When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an indi-
cator illuminates in the Vehicle Information Dis-
play. See Vehicle Information Display in the Instruments and controls section. Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-
nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-
tery life may become shorter. For information regarding replacement of a bat-
tery, see Battery replacement in the Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself section. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 143 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The remote keyless entry function will not func-
tion under the following conditions:
When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range. When the doors or the trunk are open or not closed securely. When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged. CAUTION When locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle. CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelligent Key:
Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function. Do not drop the Intelligent Key. Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object. Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key. Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely dry. Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140F (60C). Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet. Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers. If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-
gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer. OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range. When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operat-
ing location, the Intelligent Key systems operat-
ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly. The operating range is within 33 ft (10 m) of the vehicle. HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance de-
pends upon the conditions around the vehicle. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 144 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CAUTION After locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. WPD0359 WPD0360 Locking doors 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion. 2. Close all doors. 3. Press the button on the Intelligent Key. 4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once. 5. All doors will be locked. 3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Unlocking doors 1. Press the button on the Intelligent Key. 2. The hazard warning lights flash once. 3. Press the button again within 5 sec-
onds to unlock all doors. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 145 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. See Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section. Opening windows The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously open windows equipped with automatic opera-
tion. To open the windows, press the but-
ton on the Intelligent Key for longer than 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked. The door windows will open while pressing the button on the Intelligent Key. The door windows cannot be closed by using the Intelligent Key. NOTE:
The unlocking operation can be changed in Selective door unlock in the Vehicle Set-
tings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, see Vehicle infor-
mation display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual. All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pressing the button:
Opening any doors. Pushing the ignition switch. The interior light illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position. The light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations:
Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion. Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key. Switching the room light switch to the OFF position. WPD0364 Releasing the trunk lid button for longer than 0.5 sec-
Press the onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release button will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position or when the trunk cancel switch is in the OFF position. See Cancel switch in this section. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 146 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 NOTE:
If you change the answer back horn and light flash feature with the Intelligent Key, the vehicle information display screen will show the current mode after the ignition switch has been cycled from the OFF to the ON position. The vehicle information dis-
play screen can also be used to change the answer back horn mode. See Answer back horn in the Instruments and controls section. To deactivate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds. The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to confirm that the answer back horn feature has been deactivated. To activate: Press and hold the and once more. buttons for at least 2 seconds The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated. Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered. WPD0361 WPD0362 Using the panic alarm Answer back horn feature If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention button on the by pressing and holding the Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds. The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time. If desired, the answer back horn feature can be deactivated using the Intelligent Key. When de-
button is activated and the LOCK pushed the hazard indicator flashes twice and when the UNLOCK button is pushed, nei-
ther the hazard indicator nor the horn operates. The panic alarm stops when:
It has run for a period of time, or Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key. 3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 147 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-
pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel. When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. See the Troubleshooting guide that follows and Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 148 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected. Symptom Possible Cause Remedy When stopping the engine When opening the drivers door to get out of the vehicle When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle When closing the door with the inside lock knob turned to LOCK When pushing the LOCK button on the Intelligent Key to lock the door When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine When pushing the ignition switch The Shift to Park warning appears in the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously. The Door Open warning appears in the dis-
play and the inside warning chime sounds continuously. The No Key Detected warning appears in the display, the outside chime sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds. The Shift to Park warning appears in the display and the outside chime sounds continuously. The outside chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds and all the doors unlock. The outside chime sounds for approximately 2 seconds. The shift selector is not in the P (Park) position. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position. The ignition switch is in the ACC position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. The ignition switch is in the ACC position and the shift selector is not in the P (Park) position. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
tion and place the ignition switch in the OFF position. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. The Key low battery indicator appears in the display. The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. (See Battery in the Maintenance and do-it-
yourself section.) The KEY ID Incorrect warning appears in the display, the outside chime sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds. The Intelligent Key system warning light in the meter illuminates in yellow. The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. Contact a NISSAN dealer. 3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 149 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped) LPD2078 The button will be on the NISSAN Intelli-
gent Key if the vehicle has remote engine start. This feature allows the engine to start from out-
side the vehicle. The following features may be affected when the remote start feature is used:
Vehicles with manual or automatic climate control systems will default to the last used heating or cooling mode. Vehicle equipped with heated seats may have this feature come on during a remote start. See Heated seats in the Instruments and controls section for more information. Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws require a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any requirements. Other conditions may affect the function of the Remote Engine Start feature. See Conditions the remote start will not work in this section for additional information. Other conditions can affect the performance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. See NISSAN In-
telligent Key System in this section for addi-
tional information. REMOTE ENGINE START OPERATING RANGE The remote engine start function can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the speci-
fied operating range from the vehicle. When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operat-
ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly. The remote engine start operating range is ap-
proximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle. REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE To use the remote start feature to start the engine perform the following:
1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle. 2. Press the doors. LOCK button to lock all 3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the remote start button until the turn signal lights illuminate. If the vehicle is not within view press and hold the remote start but-
ton for about 2 seconds. The following events will occur when the engine starts:
The parking lights will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running. The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on. The engine will continue to run for 10 min-
utes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for an additional 10 minutes. See Extending engine run time in this section. Depress the brake and place the ignition switch in the ON position before driving. For further instructions see Driving the vehicle in the Starting and driving section. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 150 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The Remote Start function has been switched to the OFF position in Vehicle Set-
tings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, see Vehicle informa-
tion display in the Instruments and con-
trols section of this manual. The remote engine start may display a warning or indicator in the vehicle information display. For an explanation of the warning or indicator please see Vehicle information display warning and indica-
tors in the Instruments and controls section. EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME Turn on the hazard warning flashers. The remote start feature can be extended one time by performing the steps listed in Remote starting the vehicle in this section. Run time will be calculated as follows:
The first 10 minute run time will start when the remote start function is performed. The second 10 minutes will start immedi-
ately when the remote start function is per-
formed. For example, if the engine has been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added, the engine will run for a total of 15 minutes. A maximum of two remote starts, or a single start with an extension, are allowed between ignition cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position and then back to the OFF position be-
fore the remote start procedure can be used again. CANCELING A REMOTE START To cancel a remote start, perform one of the following:
Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and until the parking lights press and hold turn off. 3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Cycle the ignition switch ON and then OFF. CONDITIONS THE REMOTE START WILL NOT WORK The remote start will not operate if any of the following conditions are present:
The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition. The hood is not securely closed. The hazard warning lights are on. The IKey Indicator Light remains solid in the vehicle information display. The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle. The ignition switch is pushed without an Intelligent Key in the vehicle. The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelli-
gent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is not depressed. Two remote vehicle starts, or a single remote start with an extension, have already been used. The vehicle is not in P (Park). REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 151 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 HOOD TRUNK LID LPD2079 LPD2080 1 Pull the hood lock release handle located below the drivers side instrument panel; the hood springs up slightly. 2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood. 3 Remove the support rod from the clamp. 4 Insert the support rod into the slot on the passenger side fender ledge. 5. When closing the hood, return the support rod to its original position, lower the hood to approximately 30 cm (12 in) above the latch and release it. This allows proper engage-
ment of the hood latch. WARNING Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. The vehicle should only ever be operated with the hood securely closed. If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood. Instrument panel Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 152 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys. To open the trunk lid perform one of the following after unlocking the vehicle:
Press the button on the instrument panel. Press the button on the Intelligent Key. Push the A release switch (if so equipped). To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid down securely. WPD0364 LPD2077 Intelligent Key Request switch OPENER OPERATION WARNING NOTE:
Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See Ex-
haust gas in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Request switches for all doors and trunk can be deactivated when the I-Key Door Lock setting is switched to OFF in the Ve-
hicle Settings of the vehicle information display. See Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section. 3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 153 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-
nated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light. The handle is located inside the trunk compart-
ment on the interior of the trunk lid. Cancel switch INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE LPD0395 LPD2081 When the switch, located inside the glove box, is in the OFF position, the power to the trunk lid will be cancelled. The trunk lid cannot be opened when:
using the trunk lid release switch, the trunk open request switch (if so equipped) is pushed, when the Intelligent Key is in range of the vehicle or the HOLD button on the Intelligent Key is pressed. WARNING Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys. The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 154 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 FUEL-FILLER DOOR LPD2022 OPENER OPERATION The fuel-filler door release is located below the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely. 3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments FUEL-FILLER CAP WARNING Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi-
tions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emis-
sion control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause Malfunction Indicator Light the
(MIL) to come on. Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle. Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers:
Always place the container on the ground when filling. Do not use electronic devices when filling. Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are fill-
ing it. Use only approved portable fuel con-
tainers for flammable liquid. CAUTION The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap-
pear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly tightened. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning ap-
Malfunction pears may cause the Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 155 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. light illuminates because If the the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue light to drive the vehicle. The should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle in-
spected by a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) in the Instruments and Controls section in this manual. If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. To remove the fuel-filler cap:
Loose Fuel Cap warning LPD2082 LPD2090 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove. 2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 1 while refueling. To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-
filler tube. 2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard. The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the vehicle information display when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. To turn off the warning, perform the following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon as possible. See Fuel-filler cap. 2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks. 3. Press the next button A on the steer-
ing wheel for about 1 second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning B after tight-
ening the fuel-filler cap. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 156 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING SUN VISORS LPD2085 TILT OPERATION Pull the lock lever down 1 and adjust the steer-
ing wheel up or down 2 to the desired position. Push the lock lever up 1 firmly to lock the steering wheel in place. WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. 3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments TELESCOPIC OPERATION Pull the lever 1 all the way toward you and adjust the steering wheel forward or backward in direction 3 , to the desired position. Lock the wheel by releasing the lever and ensure that the lever has returned to its original position. WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driv-
ers air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts. WPD0344 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 18:46:10 2012 SUM: 23EB9F81
/nissan_pdm/nissancims/owners/com/manual-tele.alt TELESCOPIC OPERATION Pull the lock lever down 1 and adjust the steer-
ing wheel forward or backward 3 to the desired position. Push the lock lever up 1 firmly to lock the steering wheel in place. WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driv-
ers air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts. 0-1 JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 157 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 1 To block glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor. 2 To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side. 3 To extend (if so equipped) the sun visor, slide in or out as needed. CAUTION Do not store the sun visor before return-
ing the extension to its original position. Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward. MIRRORS LPD2067 VANITY MIRRORS To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the mirror cover is open. WPD0126 REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) The night position 1 reduces glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night. Use the day position 2 when driving in daylight hours. WARNING Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 158 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-
cally dims during night time conditions and ac-
cording to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-
matic anti-glare feature is operating. NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sensors 1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation. 3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments LPD0469 LPD0470 Type A - Without compass Type B - With compass Type A and Type B The indicator light 2 will automatic anti-glare feature is operating. illuminate when the The indicator light will turn off. To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again, press:
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:
the
button for inside mirrors without the O button for inside mirrors without compass. the button for inside mirrors with compass. compass. the button for inside mirrors with compass. The indicator light will turn on. For information on HomeLink Universal Trans-
ceiver operation, see the HomeLink Universal Transceiver in the Instruments and controls section of this manual. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 159 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 For information on the compass display (if so equipped), see Compass display in the Instru-
ments and controls section of this manual. OUTSIDE MIRRORS The outside mirror remote control only operates when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position. Move the small switch 1 to select the right or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position using the large switch 2 . Heated mirrors (if so equipped) Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-
tional information, see Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual. LPD2083 WARNING Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 160 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 LPD2084 Manual folding outside mirrors (if so equipped) Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it. 3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 161 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Control panel buttons color screen with Navigation System (if so equipped) . 4-4 How to use the touch screen . 4-5 How to use the BACK button . 4-7 How to use the MENU button . 4-7 button. 4-11 RearView Monitor (if so equipped). 4-11 How to read the displayed lines . 4-12 How to park with predicted course lines
(Navigation System only) . 4-13 Difference between predicted and actual distances . 4-14 Adjusting the screen . 4-17 Operating tips. 4-18 Vents . 4-18 Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(if so equipped) . 4-19 Controls . 4-20 Heater operation . 4-21 Air conditioner operation . 4-22 Air flow charts. 4-23 Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . 4-27 Automatic operation . 4-28 Manual operation . 4-28 Operating tips. 4-29 Servicing air conditioner. 4-30 Audio system . 4-30 Radio . 4-30 FM radio reception . 4-30 AM radio reception . 4-31 Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . 4-31 Audio operation precautions . 4-31 FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
(if so equipped) . 4-39 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) player (Type A) (if so equipped) . 4-43 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) player (Type B) (if so equipped) . 4-48 USB interface (models without Navigation System) (if so equipped) . 4-54 USB interface (models with Navigation System) . 4-56 iPod* player operation without Navigation System (if so equipped) . 4-57 iPod* player operation with Navigation System (if so equipped) . 4-59 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 162 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Bluetooth streaming audio without Navigation System (Type A) (if so equipped) . 4-62 Bluetooth streaming audio without Navigation System (Type B) (if so equipped). 4-62 Bluetooth streaming audio with Navigation System (if so equipped) . 4-64 Pandora audio (United States only)
(if so equipped) . 4-65 CD care and cleaning . 4-67 Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) . 4-68 Antenna . 4-69 Car phone or CB radio . 4-69 Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System without Navigation System (Type A) (if so equipped) . 4-70 Regulatory Information . 4-72 Using the system . 4-72 Control buttons . 4-75 Getting started . 4-75 List of voice commands . 4-77 Voice Adaptation (VA) mode . 4-81 Manual control . 4-83 Troubleshooting guide . 4-84 Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System without Navigation System (Type B) (if so equipped). 4-85 Regulatory Information . 4-86 Using the system . 4-87 Control buttons . 4-88 Connecting procedure . 4-88 Voice commands . 4-89 Making a call . 4-91 Receiving a call . 4-91 During a call . 4-92 Ending a call . 4-92 Text messaging. 4-92 Bluetooth settings . 4-94 Manual control . 4-96 Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System (if so equipped) . 4-96 Regulatory Information . 4-98 Voice commands . 4-98 Connecting procedure . 4-99 Vehicle phonebook . 4-100 Making a call . 4-101 Receiving a call . 4-101 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 163 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 During a call . 4-102 Ending a call . 4-102 Text messaging. 4-102 Bluetooth settings . 4-104 Phone settings . 4-105 NISSAN Voice Recognition System
(if so equipped) . 4-106 Using the system . 4-106 System features . 4-108 Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System voice commands. 4-109 Navigation System voice commands . 4-110 Audio system voice commands. 4-110 Information voice commands. 4-111 Help voice commands . 4-111 Troubleshooting guide . 4-112 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 164 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WARNING Positioning of the heating or air condi-
tioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in or-
der that full attention may be given to the driving operation. Do not disassemble or modify this sys-
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock. Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock. In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock. CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) 1. PWR button/VOL (volume) control knob 2. Display screen 5. MAP button*
6. NAV button*
3. ENTER / AUDIO button / TUNE / SCROLL 7. MENU button knob 4. BACK button 8.
(brightness control) button LHA2239 4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 165 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WARNING ALWAYS give your full attention to driving. Avoid using vehicle features that could distract you. If distracted, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. 9. button**
10. CAMERA button
* For information regarding the Navigation system control buttons, refer to the separate Navigation System Owners Manual. information regarding the Bluetooth
** For Hands-Free Phone System control button, see Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System in this section. When you use this system, make sure the engine is running. If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will discharge the battery, and the engine will not start. Reference symbols:
Example Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown only on the display. These keys can be selected by touching the screen. HOW TO USE THE TOUCH SCREEN CAUTION The glass display screen may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the glass screen breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could result in an injury. To clean the display, never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the panel. Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction. To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-
not be operated while driving. The on-screen functions that are not available while driving will be grayed out or muted. Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-
ate the navigation system. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 166 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 LHA2245 LHA2246 LHA1478 Touch screen operation Selecting the item:
Touch an item to select. For example, to select the Audio key, touch the Audio key 1 on the screen. Adjusting the item:
For screens where an item can be adjusted incre-
mentally, such as when adjusting the bass and treble for the audio system, touch the + key 1 or the key 2 to adjust the settings of an item. When there are more items than can be dis-
played on one screen, touch the up arrow 3 to scroll up the page or touch the down arrow 4 to scroll down the page. Other items are adjusted by selecting one of a set number of conditions. For example, the Display Mode can be set to Automatic, Day or Night. To adjust this type of item, touch the item 1 . The item will cycle through the available settings and the red indicator lights to the left of the setting condition 2 will come on or turn off accordingly. 4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 167 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 OK:
Completes the character input. Touch screen maintenance If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-
tergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen. HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON Press the previous screen. LHA2247 BACK button to return to the Inputting characters:
Touch the letter key 1 . There are some options available when inputting characters. 123 / ABC:
Changes the available character set to num-
bers. Space:
Inserts a space. Delete:
Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the Delete key to delete all of the characters. LHA2253 HOW TO USE THE MENU BUTTON For more information about the POIs Powered by Google, Google Send-To-Car, Traffic Information and Weather features, see the separate Navigation System Owners Manual. For more information about the Voice Com-
mands key, see Nissan Voice Recognition Sys-
tem in this section. To select and/or adjust several functions, fea-
tures and modes that are available for your ve-
hicle:
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select the Settings key. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 168 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 For information regarding Bluetooth audio, see Bluetooth streaming audio with Navigation System in this section. LHA2248 LHA2249 3. Select the desired item. Audio For audio setup, refer to Audio system in this section. Navigation Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
ers Manual for information regarding this item. Phone & Bluetooth For information regarding the Bluetooth Hands-
Free Phone System, see Bluetooth Hands-
Free Phone System in this section. 4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems System Select the System key to select and/or adjust various functions of the system. A screen with additional options will appear. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 169 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Display Mode The display can be adjusted to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch the Display Mode key to cycle through the options. Day and Night modes are suited for the respective times of day, while Automatic controls the display automatically. Scroll Direction The direction that menus scroll can be adjusted. Choose either up or down. LHA1482 Display:
Select the Display key to adjust the appearance of the display. The following settings can be adjusted:
Brightness The brightness of the display can be set to Very Bright, Bright, Default, Dark or Very Dark. Touch the Brightness key to cycle through the options. LHA2250 Clock Settings:
Select the Clock Settings key to adjust the time and the appearance of the clock on the display. The following settings can be adjusted:
Time Format The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours. Date Format Select from five possible formats of displaying the day, month and year. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 170 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Clock Mode Select the mode for the clock. Auto uses the systems GPS to automatically maintain the time. Manual allows you to set the clock using the Set Clock Manually key. Time Zone maintains the time based upon the zone selected when selecting the Time Zone key. LHA2251 LHA2252 Set Clock Manually When this setting is activated, the clock can be set manually. Touch the + or - keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down. Clock Mode must be set to Manual for this option to be available. Daylight Savings Time When this setting is activated, daylight savings time is on. Touch the Daylight Savings Time key to toggle the setting on or off. Time Zone Choose the applicable time zone from the list. Language:
Select the Language key to adjust the language used by the system. The language can be set to English, Franais or Espaol. Touchscreen click:
Select the Touchscreen Click key to toggle the touchscreen click feature on or off. When acti-
vated, a click sound will be heard every time a key on the screen is touched. System Beeps:
Select the System Beeps key to toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When acti-
vated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up 4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 171 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped) message appears on the screen or a button on the unit (such as the button) is pressed and held for two seconds. When the shift selector is shifted into the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows a rearward view from the vehicle. Reset all settings/memory:
Select the Reset All Settings/Memory key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory. Info For information about the Info key, see the separate Navigation System Owners Manual. XM For XM setup, refer to Audio system in this section. BUTTON To change the display brightness, press button. Pressing the button again will the change the display to the day or the night display. If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the display will return to the previous display. Press and hold the button for more than two seconds to turn the display off. Press the button again to turn the display on. WARNING The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary ob-
jects to help avoid damaging the ve-
hicle. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground. The RearView Monitor is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper back-
ing. Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up. Always back up slowly. Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-
tor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used. Make sure that the trunk is securely closed when backing up. Do not put anything on the rearview camera. The rearview camera is in-
stalled beside the license plate light. When washing the vehicle with high-
pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing wa-
ter condensation on the lens, a mal-
function, fire or an electric shock. Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-
function or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock. CAUTION There is a plastic cover over the camera. Do not scratch the cover when cleaning dirt or snow from the cover. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 172 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Vehicle width guide lines 5 :
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up. Predicted course lines 6 (Navigation Sys-
tem only):
Indicate the predicted course when backing up. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift selector is in the R
(Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move de-
pending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steer-
ing wheel is in the neutral position. The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course. LHA2278 The predicted course lines feature can be set to on or off. 1. Press the CAMERA button. 2. Select the Show Guidelines key to toggle the feature on or off. LHA1196 HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the vehicle body line A are displayed on the monitor. Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body. Red line 1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) Yellow line 2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) Green line 3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m) Green line 4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m) 4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 173 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES (Navigation System only) WARNING Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up. Always back up slowly. Use the displayed lines as a reference. The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and road grade. If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line. discharged, If the battery is disconnected or be-
comes predicted course lines may be displayed incor-
rectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:
the Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running. Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes. When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the ACC position, the predicted course lines may be dis-
played incorrectly. The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a refer-
ence only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual dis-
tance between the vehicle and dis-
played objects. When backing up the vehicle up a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are fur-
ther than they appear. When backing up the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they ap-
pear. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. The vehicle width and predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course. LHA1197 1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle. 2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen A when the shift selector is moved to the R (Reverse) position. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 174 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines D parallel to the parking space C while referring to the pre-
dicted course lines. 5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift selector to the P
(Park) position and apply the parking brake. DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The distance guide line and the vehicle width guide line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects. 3. Slowly back up the vehicle, adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted course lines B enter the parking space C . LHA1198 WHA1504 4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 175 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Backing up on a steep uphill When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-
tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the place A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on the hill is the place B . Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor. Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the place A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on the hill is the place B . Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor. WHA1505 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 176 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Backing up behind a projecting object The position C is shown farther than the position B in the display. However, the position C is actually at the same distance as the position A . The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to the position A if the object projects over the actual backing up course. LHA1201 WHA1506 Backing up near a projecting object The predicted course lines A do not touch the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course. 4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 177 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 4. Adjust the level using the TUNE-SCROLL knob and then press the ENTER/SETTING button to apply the adjustment. Do not adjust the Brightness or Contrast of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. LHA2254 Without Navigation System ADJUSTING THE SCREEN The procedure for adjusting the quality of the screen differs depending on the type of screen present on the vehicle. For vehicles without Navigation System:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button. 2. Turn the TUNE-SCROLL knob to highlight the Brightness or Contrast key. 3. Press the ENTER/SETTING button. With Navigation System For vehicles with Navigation System:
LHA1482 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select the Settings key. 3. Select the System key. 4. Select the Display key. 5. Touch the Brightness key and adjust the level to the desired setting. Do not adjust the display of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 178 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 VENTS LHA2255 Side Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent slides. Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move the dial toward the to open the vents or toward the to close them. OPERATING TIPS When the shift selector is shifted to R (Re-
verse), the monitor screen automatically changes to the RearView Monitor mode. However, the radio can be heard. It may take some time until the RearView Monitor is displayed after the shift selector has been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects may be distorted momentarily until the Rear-
View Monitor screen is displayed com-
pletely. When the shift selector is returned to a position other than R (Reverse), it may take some time until the screen changes. Objects on the screen may be distorted until they are completely displayed. When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display ob-
jects. This is not a malfunction. When strong light directly enters the cam-
era, objects may not be displayed clearly. Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper. This is not a malfunction. The screen may flicker under fluorescent light. This is not a malfunction. The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-
tor may differ somewhat from those of the actual object. When the contrast of objects is low at night, pressing the SETTING button or MENU but-
ton may not change the brightness. Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark place or at night. If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera, the RearView Monitor may not display ob-
jects. Clean the camera. Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discolor-
ation. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth. Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected. Do not use body wax on the camera window. If body wax does get on the camera window, wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-
ened with mild detergent diluted with water. 4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 179 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped) WARNING The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running. Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Center Rear LHA2256 LHA1134 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 180 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CONTROLS Fan control dial The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and controls fan speed. Air flow control buttons The air flow control buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets. MAX A/C Air flows from center and side vents with maximum cooling. Air flows from center and side vents. Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from defroster outlets. 5. 6. Rear window defroster button Front windshield defrost button LHA2243 Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right. 1. 2. 3. Fan speed control / system OFF dial /
air conditioning (A/C) button Air flow control buttons Temperature control dial / MAX A/C button Air recirculation button 4. 4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 181 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Air recirculation button On position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the button to the ON position when:
driving on a dusty road. to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-
senger compartment. for maximum cooling when using the air con-
ditioner. The air recirculation function does not operate when in the air flow modes. or Off position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-
ment and distributed through the selected outlet. Use the off position for normal heater or air con-
ditioner operation. Air conditioner button Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the desired position and press the button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light comes on when the air conditioner is operating. To turn off the air conditioner, push the button again. The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running. Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch For more information about the rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch, see Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual. HEATER OPERATION Heating This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost outlets and the side vent outlets. 1. Press the button to the OFF position for normal heating. 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the hot position. Ventilation This mode directs outside air to the side and center vents. 1. Press the button to the OFF position. 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position. Defrosting or defogging This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost/defog the windows. 1. Press the defrost/defog button
. 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the hot position. To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-
dows, turn the fan control dial to the highest setting and the temperature control to the full HOT position. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 182 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 When the position is selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on (the indi-
cator light on the button will come on) if the outside temperature is more than 36F
(2C). This dehumidifies the air which helps mode au-
defog the windshield. The tomatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging perfor-
mance. Bi-level heating The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the front and rear floor outlets. 1. Press the button to the OFF position. 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position. Heating and defogging This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-
shield. 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion. The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the hot position. When the position is selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on if the out-
side temperature is more than 36F (2C). The indicator light on the A/C button will come on. This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The mode automatically turns off, allowing out-
side air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defog-
ging performance. Operating tips Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This improves heater operation. AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the button to desired position, and push in the activate the air conditioner. When the air condi-
tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation. Cooling This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air. 1. Press the button to the OFF position. 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion. 4. Push the comes on. button. The indicator light 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position. For quick cooling when the outside tem-
button to perature is high, push the the ON position. Be sure to return the to the OFF position for normal cooling. MAX A/C may be used for quick cooling. Dehumidified heating This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air. 1. Press the button to the OFF position. 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion. 1. Press the 4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems air flow control button. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 183 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 button. The indicator light Operating tips AIR FLOW CHARTS 4. Push the comes on. 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position. Dehumidified defogging This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air. 1. Press the air flow control button. 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion. When the or are selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on (the indicator light may or may not illuminate) if the outside temperature is more than 36F
(2C). This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The mode au-
tomatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging perfor-
mance. The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation button should always be in the OFF posi-
tion for heating and defrosting. Keep the windows and moonroof closed while the air conditioner is in operation. After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This allows the air con-
ditioner to cool the interior more quickly. The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps pre-
vent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication. A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
perature over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this manual. The air conditioner is always on in mode, regardless of whether the indicator light is on or off. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 184 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA2284 LHA2285 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 185 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 LHA2286 LHA2287 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 186 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA2288 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 187 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped) A/C (air conditioner) button 7. 8. MODE (manual air flow control) button 9. 10. ON-OFF button 11.
(fan speed control) buttons
(rear window defroster) button WARNING The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running. Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner. 1. 2. 3.
(front defroster) button Temperature control dial (drivers side)/
AUTO (automatic) climate control but-
ton Display screen 4. 5. 6. LHA2244 Temperature control dial (passengers side)/DUAL (passengers side tempera-
ture control) button Fresh air intake button Air recirculation button Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 188 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO) This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. 1. Press the AUTO button on. (The indicator on the button will illuminate and AUTO will be displayed.) 2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. Adjust the temperature display to about 75F (24C) for normal operation. The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con-
trolled automatically. A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-
function. 3. You can individually set drivers and front passengers side temperature using each temperature control dial. When the DUAL button or passengers side temperature dial is turned, the DUAL indicator will come on. To turn off the passengers side temperature control, press the DUAL button. Heating (A/C OFF) The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode. 1. Press the A/C button. (A/C OFF will be displayed and A/C indicator will turn off.) 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature. The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con-
trolled automatically. Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature or the system may not work properly. Not recommended if windows fog up. Dehumidified defrosting or defogging 1. Press the front defroster button on.
(The indicator light on the button will come on.) 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature. To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, use the fan speed control dial to set the fan speed to maximum. As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, press the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode. When the front defroster button is pressed, the air conditioner will automati-
cally be turned on at outside temperatures above 36F (2C) (The indicator light may or may not illuminate). The air recirculate mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compart-
ment to further improve the defogging per-
formance. MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control Press the fan control buttons control the fan speed. to manually Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed. Air recirculation air recirculation button to recir-
Push the culate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the button will come on. 4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 189 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode or the front defrosting and foot out-
let mode. Fresh air intake fresh air intake button to draw Press the outside air into the passenger compartment. The indicator light on the button will come on. Automatic intake air control In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be con-
trolled automatically. To manually control the in-
air recirculation button. take air, press the To return to the automatic control mode, press and hold the air recirculation button or press and hold the fresh air intake button for about 2 seconds. The indicator lights (both air recirculation and fresh air intake buttons) will flash twice, and then the intake air will be con-
trolled automatically. Air flow control Pressing the MODE button manually controls air flow and selects the air outlet:
Air flows from center and side vents. Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flows from defroster and foot outlets. Air flows from defroster outlets. To turn system off Press the OFF button. Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch For more information about the rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch, see Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual. OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-
ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally. LHA1136 The sunload sensor, located on the top drivers side of the instrument panel, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put any-
thing on or around this sensor. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 190 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant does not harm the earths ozone layer. Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. See Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual. RADIO With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON posi-
tion, press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the ignition should be placed in the ACC position. Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences. A NISSAN dealer is able to service your environ-
mentally friendly air conditioning system. Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
hicle may influence radio reception quality. WARNING Radio reception The air conditioner system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner ser-
vice should be done only by an experi-
enced technician with proper equipment. Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-
dio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-
ity of that reception. However, there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These char-
acteristics are completely normal in a given re-
ception area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system. 4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Reception conditions will constantly change be-
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other ve-
hicles can work against ideal reception. De-
scribed below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception. Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-
vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-
nate the noise. FM RADIO RECEPTION Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 30 mi
(40 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-
nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-
of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-
acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect off objects. Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 191 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position
(usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter), static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response. Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-
mentary flutter or loss of sound. AM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-
ject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver. Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist. Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights. SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so equipped) When the satellite radio is used for the first time or the battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-
function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data. No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the SAT band option is selected unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite ra-
dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal. If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite antenna. A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance. Remove the ice to restore satellite radio reception. LHA0099 AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 192 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Compact disc (CD) player CAUTION Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot. This could damage the CD and/or CD player. Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and/or CD player. Only one CD can be loaded into the CD player at a time. Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging. During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the hu-
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely. The player may skip while driving on rough roads. The CD player sometimes cannot func-
tion when the compartment tempera-
ture low. Decrease/increase the temperature before use. extremely high or is Do not expose the CD to direct sun-
CHECK DISC:
light. CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty, scratched or covered with finger-
prints may not work properly. The following CDs may not work prop-
erly:
Copy control compact discs (CCCD) Recordable compact discs (CD-R) Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunc-
tion:
Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-
rectly (the label side is facing up, etc.). Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches. PRESS EJECT:
This is an error due to excessive tem-
perature inside the player. Remove the CD by pressing the EJECT button. After a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal. 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter UNPLAYABLE:
The file is unplayable in this audio sys-
tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped) CD). CDs that are not round CDs with a paper label CDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges This audio system can only play pre-
recorded CDs. It has no capability to record or burn CDs. If the CD cannot be played, one of the following messages will be displayed. 4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 193 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Sampling frequency Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second. Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media. Writing data once to the media is called a single session, and writing more than once is called a multisession. ID3/WMA Tag The ID3/WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-
mation is displayed on the Artist/song title line on the display.
* Windows and Windows Media are regis-
tered trademarks and trademarks in the United States of America and other countries of Micro-
soft Corporation of the USA. Compact disc with MP3 or WMA (if so equipped) Terms:
MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most well-known compressed digital audio file format. This format allows for near CD quality sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesnt hear. WMA Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a compressed audio format created by Micro-
soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality. Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file. Playback order chart WHA1078 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 194 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA files is as illustrated. The names of folders not containing MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the display. If there is a file in the top level of the disc, Root Folder is displayed. The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order. 4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 195 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Specification chart:
Supported media Supported file systems Supported versions*1 MP3 WMA Version Sampling frequency Bit rate Version Sampling frequency Bit rate Tag information Folder levels Text character number limitation Displayable character codes*2 CD, CD-R, CD-RW ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported. MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5 8 kHz - 48 kHz 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR WMA7, WMA8, WMA9 32 kHz - 48 kHz 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only) Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder) 128 characters 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 196 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom Cannot play Poor sound quality It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing. Music cuts off or skips Skipping with high bit rate files Moves immediately to the next song when playing Songs do not play back in the desired order Cause and Countermeasure Check if the disc was inserted correctly. Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player. If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature. If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played. Files with extensions other than .MP3,.WMA, .mp3 or .wma cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications. Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc. Check if the disc is protected by copyright. Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. Bit rate may be too low. If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing. The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed. Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data. When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of .MP3, .WMA, .mp3or .wma, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song. The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order. 4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 197 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Universal Serial Bus (USB) memory (if so equipped) This system supports various USB memory sticks, USB hard drives and iPod players. There are some USB devices which may not be sup-
ported with this system. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB connector. Do not force the memory stick or USB cable into the USB connector. During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the USB memory stick and dehumidify or ventilate the player com-
pletely. The player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use. Do not leave the USB memory in a place prone to static electricity or where the air conditioner blows directly. The data in the USB memory may be damaged. Prepare the USB device by yourself be-
cause it is not equipped with the vehicle. The USB device cannot be formatted with this system. If you want to format the USB memory, use your personal computer. Partitioned USB devices may not be played correctly. Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed properly on the vehicle center screen. NISSAN recommends using English lan-
guage characters with USB devices. Do not connect the USB device if the con-
nector or cable is wet. Allow the cable and/or connectors to dry completely before connecting the USB device. Large video podcast files cause slow re-
sponses in the iPod. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but it will soon recover. If the iPod automatically selects large video podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but it will soon recover. Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on the iPod. The iPod nano (1st Generation) may re-
main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case, please manually reset the iPod. The iPod nano (2nd Generation) will con-
tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-
nected during a seek operation. An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using the iPod nano (2nd generation). If you are using an iPod (3rd Generation with Dock connector), do not use very long names for the song title, album name or artist name to avoid the iPod resetting itself. iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Bluetooth streaming audio Some Bluetooth audio devices may not be recognized by the in-vehicle audio system. It is necessary to set up the wireless con-
nection between a compatible Bluetooth audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth module before using the Bluetooth audio. Operating procedure of the Bluetooth au-
dio will vary depending on the devices. Make sure how to operate your audio device be-
fore using it with this system. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 198 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The Bluetooth audio may be stopped under the following conditions:
Receiving a call on the Hands-Free Phone System. Checking the connection to the hands-
free phone. Do not place the Bluetooth audio device in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless con-
nection disruption. While an audio device is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual. This system supports the Bluetooth Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP). BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Visteon. CD eject button 1. 2. CD insert slot SCAN button 3. 4. DISP button RPT/RDM button 5. 6. TUNE/FOLDER knob / MENU button AUX IN jack 7. 8. AUX button 9. CD button 10. AM button 11. FM button LHA2241 4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 199 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 12. VOL (volume) control knob / power but-
ton button 13. Station select (1 - 6) buttons 14. TRACK 15. FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped) SEEK button For all operation precautions, see Audio opera-
tion precautions in this section. Audio main operation VOL (volume) control knob / power but-
ton Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, then press the VOL (volume) control knob / power button. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, place the ignition in the ACC position. The mode (radio or CD) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off resumes playing. When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on. Pressing the VOL (volume) control knob / power button again turns the system off. Turn the VOL (volume) control knob / power button to the right to increase volume or to the left to decrease volume. MENU button (Bass, Treble, Balance, Fade, Speed Sensitive Volume and Clock):
Press the MENU button to change the mode as follows:
Bass Treble Balance Fade Spd. Sen. Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) AUX IN Volume Clock Clock Adjust To adjust the Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press the MENU button until the desired mode SEEK or appears in the display. Press the button to adjust the setting to the TRACK desired level (-5 to +5). Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers. Fade adjusts the sound between the front and rear speakers. Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the MENU button repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-
wise, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds. Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) adjusts the vol-
ume of the audio system as the vehicles driving speed changes. It can be set as follows:
OFF LOW MID HIGH DISP (display) button:
Press the DISP (display) button while a CD is playing to change the text shown in the audio display as follows:
For CDs:
Running Time Album Title: Artist Name:
Song Title For MP3 CDs:
Running Time Folder Title: Album Title:
Artist Name: Song Title:
If the text information is too long to fully be dis-
played on the screen; press and hold the DISP button for longer than 1.5 seconds to scroll through the rest of the text. Press the DISP (display) button while the radio is playing to toggle the audio display between sta-
tion number and RDS. Clock operation To turn the clock display on or off, press the MENU button repeatedly until Clock appears on the display. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to toggle the setting (ON or OFF). Clock set 1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until Adjust Clock appears on the display. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 200 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 2. Press the ENTER button. 3. Change Hour will appear on the screen. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the hours and then press ENTER. 4. Change Minute will appear on the screen. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the minutes and then press ENTER. The display will return to the regular clock display after 10 seconds if no further adjustment is per-
formed. FM/AM radio operation AM and FM buttons:
Press the AM button to change the band to AM. If another audio source is playing when the AM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing. Press the FM button to change the band as follows:
FM1 FM2 FM1 If another audio source is playing when the FM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing. The FM stereo indicator (ST) illuminates during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception. 1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for the AM band. SEEK and TRACK (tuning) buttons:
Press the SEEK button to tune from low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcast-
ing station. to tune from high Press the TRACK button to low frequencies and stop at the next broad-
casting station. Press and hold either button to seek at a faster speed. SCAN (tuning) button:
Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the display window. Scan tuning begins from low to high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 sec-
onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-
cient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button again during this 5 second period stops scan tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station. 1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 using the AM or FM button. 2. Tune to the desired station using manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 6) until a beep sound is heard. 3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner. If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations. Compact disc (CD) player operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, and carefully insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side up. The compact disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts to play. If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play. 4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 201 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CD button:
When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns off and the last used compact disc starts to play. SEEK and TRACK (Fast Forward, Rewind) buttons:
or TRACK When the SEEK button button is pressed while the compact disc is play-
ing, the compact disc plays at an increased speed while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal play speed. SEEK and TRACK buttons:
button is pressed while When the SEEK the compact disc is playing, the next track follow-
ing the present one starts to play from the begin-
ning. Press the SEEK button several times to skip several tracks. Each time the button is pressed, the CD advances one additional track. The track number appears in the display window.
(When the last track on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is played.) button is pressed, the When the TRACK track being played returns to the beginning. Press the TRACK button several times to skip back several tracks. Each time the button is pressed the CD moves back one track. RPT/RDM button:
Press the RPT/RDM button while a compact disc is playing to change the play pattern as follows:
CD:
SCAN (CDs) button:
Press the SCAN button for less than 1.5 seconds to scan all tracks of the current disc for 10 seconds per track. The SCAN icon is flashed during scan mode. The scan mode is canceled once it scans through all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button is pressed during scan mode. CD EJECT:
TRACK REPEAT DISC RANDOM DISC REPEAT MP3/WMA CD:
When the pact disc loaded, ejected. button is pressed with a com-
the compact disc will be FOLDER REPEAT TRACK REPEAT DISC RANDOM FOLDER RANDOM DISC RE-
PEAT When the button is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off. TRACK REPEAT: The track that is currently play-
ing will be repeated. DISC RANDOM: The order of the tracks on the disc will be mixed during play. DISC REPEAT: The disc currently playing will be repeated. FOLDER REPEAT: The tracks in the current folder will be repeated. FOLDER RANDOM: The order of the tracks in the folder will be mixed during play. AUX (Auxiliary) button:
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cas-
sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop com-
puters. Press the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 202 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Press the MENU button repeatedly until AUX IN Volume appears on the screen to control the incoming volume level of the auxiliary input de-
vice. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the level between 0 and +3. Additional features For more information about the Bluetooth audio interface available with this see Bluetooth streaming audio without Navigation System (Type A) in this section. system, LHA2242 CD eject button 1. 2. XM button*
3. Display screen 4. CD insert slot 5. 6. SCAN button SEEK button CAT button 7. 8. BACK button 9. 10.TUNE/SCROLL knob, ENTER/SETTING iPod MENU button button 11.AUX IN jack 4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 203 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Audio main operation VOL (volume) knob / ON-OFF button:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the VOL (volume) knob /
ON-OFF button while the system is off to call up the mode that was playing immediately before the system was turned off. To turn the system off, press the VOL (volume) knob / ON-OFF button. Turn the VOL (volume) knob / ON-OFF button to adjust the volume. 12.Station select (1 - 6) buttons 13.RDM button 14.RPT button 15.VOL (volume) knob / ON-OFF button 16.DISP button 17.CDAUX button 18.FMAM button
*No satellite radio reception is available when the XM button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A) (if so equipped) For all operation precautions, see Audio opera-
tion precautions in this section. LHA2257 SETTING button:
Press the SETTING button to show the Settings screen on the display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the options and then press the ENTER button to make a selection. Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade Increase or decrease the level of bass, treble, balance or fade. Balance controls the level of sound between the left and right speakers. Fade controls the level of sound between the front and rear speakers. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 204 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Brightness and Contrast Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen. Clock Adjust Press the ENTER button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the value. Press the ENTER button again to set the value. LHA2258 Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) Speed Sensitive Volume adjusts the volume of the audio system as the vehicles driving speed changes. The feature can be turned off or set to a level of 1 to 5. Level 5 represents the highest degree of volume adjustment. AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of the incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides no additional boost in vol-
ume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume. 4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA2259 On-Screen Clock Select ON or OFF to control whether or not the clock is shown in the upper right corner of the display screen. RDS Display Select ON or OFF to control whether or not RDS information is displayed on the screen while the radio is playing. Language Select Select the desired language for the system. Eng-
lish, Spanish and French are the available lan-
guages. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 205 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 iPod MENU button This button can only be used for iPod opera-
tions. See iPod player operation without Navi-
gation System later in this section for details about the function of this button. FM/AM/SAT radio operation FMAM button:
Press the FMAM button to change the band as follows:
AM FM1 FM2 AM If another audio source is playing when the FMAM button is pressed, the audio source play-
ing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing. The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on the screen during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-
matically changes from stereo to monaural re-
ception. XM band select:
Press the XM button to change the band as follows:
XM1* XM2* XM3* XM1 (satellite, if so equipped) When the XM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the station last played. The last station played will also come on when the VOL/ONOFF control knob is pressed ON.
*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite radio reception will not be available unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-
stalled and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not avail-
able in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If a compact disc is playing when the XM button is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on. TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning):
Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or right for manual tuning. SEEK tuning:
Press the SEEKCAT button to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station. or Pressing the button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station. 1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2). Eighteen channels can be set for the satellite radio (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3). 1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 using the FMAM select button, or choose the satellite band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using the XM button. 2. Tune to the desired station using manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 6) until the preset number is updated on the display and the sound is briefly muted. 3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
SCAN tuning:
ner. Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-
casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear on the screen while the radio is scan tuning. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 206 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Compact disc (CD) player operation SEEK/CAT button:
RPT button:
If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play. CDAUX button:
With a CD loaded, press the CDAUX button until the CD mode is displayed on the screen. CD/MP3 display mode:
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed on the screen if the CD has been encoded with text information. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa-
tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis-
played. The track number and the total number of tracks in the current folder or on the current disc are displayed on the screen as well. SEEK/CAT (Reverse or Fast Forward) button:
while a CD or Press the SEEK/CAT button MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the begin-
ning of the current track. Press the SEEK/CAT several times to skip backward sev-
button eral tracks. Press the SEEK/CAT button while a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track. several times Press the SEEK/CAT button to skip forward several tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is played. track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the next folder is played. the last If TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only):
If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-
ing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a folder. Press and hold the SEEK/CAT button or for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played. The compact disc plays at an in-
creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal play speed. 4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems When the RPT button is pressed while a com-
pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be changed as follows:
CD:
1 Track Repeat OFF CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat OFF 1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-
peated. 1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-
peated. OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-
cator on the display will turn off. The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied. RDM button:
When the RDM button is pressed while a com-
pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be changed as follows:
CD:
1 Disc Random OFF REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 207 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 For more information about the Bluetooth audio interface available with this see Bluetooth streaming audio without Navigation System (Type B) in this section. system, For more information about the Pandora audio feature available with this system, see Pandora audio in this section. CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Disc Random 1 Folder Random OFF 1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be played randomly. 1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder will be played randomly. OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off. The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied. CDAUX button:
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cas-
sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop computer. Press the CDAUX button to play a compatible device plugged into the AUX IN jack. The CDAUX button is also used to switch the audio system to a source plugged into the USB input jack in the center console. When a device is plugged into the AUX IN jack while another de-
vice is plugged into the USB input jack, the CDAUX button is used to toggle between the two functions. For more information about the USB input jack, see USB interface (models without Navigation System) in this section. EJECT button:
When the button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played. button is pressed twice with a When the compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc is not removed within 20 seconds, the disc will reload. Additional features For more information about the iPod player available with this system, see iPod player op-
eration without Navigation System in this sec-
tion. For more information about the USB interface available with this system, see USB interface
(models without Navigation System) in this sec-
tion. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 208 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Forward seek button Backward seek button 10. 11. 12.CD button 13.FM-AM button 14.XM button
*No satellite radio reception is available when the XM button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B) (if so equipped) For all operation precautions, see Audio opera-
tion precautions in this section. Audio main operation LHA2240 VOL (volume) / PWR (power) button:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the PWR (power) button while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth audio USB or iPod) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off. 1. VOL (volume) / PWR (power) button 2. 3. CD insert slot 4. TUNE/SCROLL knob, ENTER/AUDIO CD eject button button BACK button Type B 5. 6. MENU button 7. AUX IN jack 8. Display screen 9. AUX button 4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 209 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 To turn the system off, press the PWR (power) button. Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the volume. This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-
sitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes. LHA2261 LHA2262 Audio settings:
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select the Settings key. 3. Select the Audio key. Use the touchscreen to adjust the following items to the desired setting:
Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade:
Controls the sound of the audio system. Balance adjusts the sound between the left and right speakers. Fade adjusts the sound between the front and rear speakers. Speed Sensitive Vol.:
Controls the level to which the volume is adjusted as the vehicles driving speed changes. Choose a setting or choose 0 to disable the feature en-
tirely. AUX Volume Level:
Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Available options are Low, Medium and High. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 210 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If a compact disc is playing when the XM button is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on. FM/AM/SAT radio operation FMAM button:
Press the FMAM button to change the band as follows:
AM FM1 FM2 AM If another audio source is playing when the FMAM button is pressed, the audio source play-
ing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing. The FM stereo indicator (ST) is shown on the screen during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-
matically changes from stereo to monaural re-
ception. XM band select:
Pressing the XM button will change the band as follows:
XM1* XM2* XM3* XM1* (satellite, if so equipped) When the XM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the last station played. The last station played will also come on when the VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed to turn the radio on. LHA2303 XM settings:
To view the XM settings:
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select the Settings key. 3. Select the XM key. The signal strength, activation status and other information are displayed on the screen. 4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 211 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Tuning with the TUNE/SCROLL knob:
The radio can also be manually tuned using the TUNE/SCROLL knob. When in FM or AM mode, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left for lower frequencies or to the right for higher frequencies. When in XM mode, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change the channel. SEEK tuning:
When in FM or AM mode, press the seek to tune from low to high buttons or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station. or When in XM mode, press the seek buttons or to change the category. LHA1492 LHA1489 While the radio is in XM mode, the operation can be controlled through the touchscreen. Touch the Channels key to display a list of channels. Touch a channel displayed on the list to change to that channel. Touch the Categories key to display a list of categories. Touch a category displayed on the list to display options within that category. Tuning with the touchscreen:
When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be tuned using the touchscreen. To bring up the visual tuner, touch the Tune key on the lower right corner of the screen. A screen appears with a bar running from low frequencies on the left to high frequencies on the right. Touch the screen at the location of the frequency you wish to tune and the station will change to that frequency. To return to the regular radio display screen, touch the OK key. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 212 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner. If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations. Presets can also be selected by touching the desired preset number on the screen. Compact disc (CD) player operation LHA2263 If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play. 1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for the AM band. Eighteen stations can be set for the XM band (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3). 1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 using the FMAM select button or choose the radio band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using the XM button. 2. Tune to the desired station using manual or seek tuning. Press and hold any of the de-
sired station memory buttons (1 6) until a beep sound is heard. CD button:
When the CD button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play. LHA1488 CD/MP3 display mode While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD en-
coded with text is being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist, album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when a CD is playing:
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 213 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 playing, touching the Browse key will also list the folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for selecting a song with the touchscreen to choose a folder. SEEK (Reverse or Fast Forward) buttons:
or Press and hold the seek buttons for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played. The compact disc plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the but-
ton is released, the compact disc returns to nor-
mal play speed. SEEK buttons:
Press the seek button while a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the begin-
ning of track. Press the seek button several times to skip backward sev-
eral tracks. the current Press the seek button while a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track. several times to skip Press the seek button forward several tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is played. If the last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the next folder is played. LHA1490 LHA1491 Random:
Touch the Random key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. When the random mode is icon will be displayed to the left active, the of the song title. If an MP3 CD is playing, touch-
ing Random alternates between randomly play-
ing songs within the current folder and songs from the CD as a whole. The icon is dis-
played to the left of the song title or folder name to denote which pattern is applied. To cancel Random mode, touch the Random key until no icon is displayed. Repeat:
Touch the Repeat key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. When the repeat mode is icon will be displayed to the left active, the of the song title. If an MP3 CD is playing, touch-
ing Repeat alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. The icon is displayed to the left of the song title or folder name to denote which pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the Re-
peat key until no icon is displayed. Browse:
Touch the Browse key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 214 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 When the button is pressed twice with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds, the disc will reload. Additional features For more information about the iPod player available with this system, see iPod player op-
eration with Navigation System in this section. For more information about the USB interface available with this system, see USB interface
(models with Navigation System) in this section. For more information about the Bluetooth audio interface available with this see Bluetooth streaming audio with Navigation System in this section. system, For more information about the Pandora audio feature available with this system, see Pandora audio in this section. LHA1493 AUX button:
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any stan-
dard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop computer. Press the AUX button to play a com-
patible device plugged into the AUX IN jack. EJECT button:
button is pressed with a com-
When the pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played. 4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA2264 USB INTERFACE (models without Navigation System) (if so equipped) Connecting a device to the USB input jack The USB input jack is located on the center console beneath the heater and air conditioner controls. Insert the USB device into the jack. When a compatible storage device is plugged into the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-
age device can be played through the vehicles audio system. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 215 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Audio file operation CDAUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position and press the CDAUX button to switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is playing or another audio source is plugged in through the AUX IN jack on the radio, the CDAUX button toggles between the three sources. Play information Information about the audio files being played can be displayed on the display screen of the vehicles audio system. Depending on how the audio files are encoded, information such as Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed. The track number and number of total tracks in the folder are displayed on the screen as well. SEEK/CAT (Reverse or Fast Forward) buttons:
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons or for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on the USB device is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played. The track plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast for-
warding. When the button is released, the audio file returns to normal play speed. SEEK/CAT buttons:
Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-
dio file on the USB device is playing to return to the beginning of the current track. Press the SEEK/CAT button several times to skip backward several tracks. while an au-
Press the SEEK/CAT button dio file on the USB device is playing to advance one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button several times to skip forward several tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the first track of the next folder is played. RDM button:
When the RDM button is pressed while an audio file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern can be changed as follows:
The current play pattern of the USB device is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied. RPT button:
When the RPT button is pressed while an audio file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern can be changed as follows:
1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat OFF 1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-
peated. 1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-
peated. OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-
cator on the display will turn off. The current play pattern of the USB device is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied. All Random 1 Folder Random OFF TUNE/SCROLL knob:
All Random: all tracks on the USB device will be played randomly. 1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder will be played randomly. OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off. If there are multiple folders with audio files on the USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio files the TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will re-
turn to the first track on the USB device. the USB device, turning on Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 216 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Audio file operation AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position and press the AUX button to switch to the USB input mode. If another audio source is playing and a USB memory device is inserted, press the AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode. If the system has been turned off while the USB memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL control knob to restart the USB memory. LHA2264 USB INTERFACE (models with Navigation System) Connecting a device to the USB input jack The USB input jack is located on the center console beneath the heater and air conditioner controls. Insert the USB device into the jack. When a compatible storage device is plugged into the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-
age device can be played through the vehicles audio system. 4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA1496 Play information:
Information about the audio files being played is shown on the display screen of the vehicles audio system. Touch Browse to display the list of folders and files on the USB device. Touch the name of a song on the screen to begin playing that song. Seeking buttons:
Press the button while an audio file on the USB device is playing to return to the beginning of the current track. Press the button sev-
eral times to skip backward several tracks. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 217 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Press the button while an audio file on the USB device is playing to advance one track. Press the button several times to skip for-
ward several tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the first track of the next folder is played. Random and repeat play mode:
While files on a USB device are playing, the play pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated or played randomly. Random:
Touch the Random key to apply a random play pattern to the USB device. When the random icon is displayed to the mode is active, the left of the song title or album name to denote which random pattern is applied. To cancel Ran-
dom mode, touch the Random key until no icon is displayed. Repeat:
Touch the Repeat key to apply a repeat play pattern to the USB device. When the repeat icon is displayed to the mode is active, the left of the song title or album name to denote which repeat pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat icon mode, touch the Repeat key until no is displayed. connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position. While connected to the vehicle, the iPod can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls. To disconnect the iPod from the vehicle, remove the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on the vehicle, then remove the cable from the iPod.
* iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Compatibility LHA2264 The following models are compatible:
iPod* PLAYER OPERATION WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) Connecting iPod To connect an iPod to the vehicle so that the iPod can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen, use the USB jack located on the center console below the heater and air conditioner controls. Connect the iPod-
specific end of the cable to the iPod and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on the vehicle. If your iPod supports charging via a USB connection, its battery will be charged while iPod 5th Generation (firmware version 1.3 or later) iPod Classic (80GB) (firmware version 1.1.2PC or later) iPod Classic (120GB) (firmware version 2.0.1PC or later) iPod Nano - 1st generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.3.1 or later) iPod Nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.1.3 or later) iPod Nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.1.3PC or later) Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 218 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 iPod Nano - 4th generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.0PC or later) Make sure that your iPod firmware is updated to the version indicated above. iPod Nano - 5th generation (8GB) (firm-
ware version 1.0.2PC or later) iPod Nano - 5th generation (16GB) (firm-
ware version 1.0.1PC or later) iPod Nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firm-
ware version 1.2PC or later) iPod Nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firm-
ware version 1.1PC or later) iPod Touch - 1st generation (firmware ver-
sion 2.2.1 or later) iPod Touch - 2nd generation (firmware ver-
sion 2.2.1 or later) iPod Touch - 3rd generation (firmware ver-
sion 3.1.3 or later) iPod Touch - 4th generation (firmware ver-
sion 4.3.5 or later) iPhone 3G (firmware version 4.1 or later) iPhone 3GS (firmware version 4.3 or later) iPhone 4 (firmware version 5.0 or later) iPhone 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later) Audio main operation:
Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position. Then, press the CDAUX or iPod MENU button repeatedly to switch to the iPod mode. If the audio system is turned off while the iPod is playing, the iPod plays when the audio system is turned back on. If the audio system is off, pressing the CDAUX or iPod MENU button turns the audio system on and plays the iPod. If the audio system is on, the audio system auto-
matically begins playing tracks from the iPod when it is plugged into the jack. iPod MENU button:
Press the iPod MENU button while the iPod is connected to show the iPod operation menu on the audio display. Scroll through the menu list using the TUNESCROLL control dial. Press EN-
TER to select a menu item. Items in the iPod menu appear on the display in the following or-
der:
iPad (firmware version 4.3.2 or later) Now playing iPad 2 (firmware version 4.3.3 or later) 4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Playlists Artists Albums Songs Podcasts Genres Composers Audiobooks Shuffle songs For more information about each item, see the iPod Owners Manual. SEEK/CAT buttons:
Press the SEEK/CAT buttons skip backward or forward one track. or to Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons or for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played. The track plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the track returns to normal play speed. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 219 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 REPEAT (RPT):
When the RPT button is pressed while a track is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:
Repeat Off 1 Track Repeat All Repeat Repeat Off 1 Track Repeat: the current track will be repeated. All Repeat: all songs in the current list are re-
peated. Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied. RANDOM (RDM):
When the RDM button is pressed while a track is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:
Shuffle Off Track Shuffle Album Shuffle Shuffle Off Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list will be played randomly. Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list will be played randomly. Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied. BACK button:
When the BACK button is pressed, it returns to the previous menu. connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position. While connected to the vehicle, the iPod can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls. To disconnect the iPod from the vehicle, remove the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on the vehicle, then remove the cable from the iPod.
* iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Compatibility LHA2264 The following models are compatible:
iPod* PLAYER OPERATION WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) Connecting iPod To connect an iPod to the vehicle so that the iPod can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen, use the USB jack located on the center console below the heater and air conditioner controls. Connect the iPod-
specific end of the cable to the iPod and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on the vehicle. If your iPod supports charging via a USB connection, its battery will be charged while iPod 5th Generation (firmware version 1.2.3 or later) iPod Classic (firmware version 1.1.1 or later) iPod Touch (firmware version 2.0.0 or later)*
iPod Nano - 1st generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.3.1 or later) iPod Nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.1.3 or later) iPod Nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.1.3 or later) Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 220 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 iPod Nano - 4th generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.0.4 or later) iPod Nano - 5th generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.0.1 or later)
* Some features of this iPod may not be fully functional. Make sure that your iPod firmware is updated to the version indicated above. AUX button:
When the AUX button is pressed with the system off and the iPod connected, the system will turn on. If another audio source is playing and the iPod is connected, press the AUX button re-
peatedly until the center display changes to the iPod mode. LHA1494 Audio main operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position. Press the AUX button repeatedly to switch to the iPod mode. If the system has been turned off while the iPod was playing, pressing the VOL/ONOFF control knob will start the iPod. 4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 221 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Playlists Artists Albums Genres Songs Composers Audiobooks Podcasts LHA1495 Interface:
The interface for iPod operation shown on the vehicles audio system display screen is similar to the iPod interface. Use the touchscreen, BACK button or the TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the menus on the screen. When the iPod is playing, touch the Menu key to bring up the iPod interface. Depending on the iPod model, the following items may be available on the menu list screen. For further information about each item, see the iPod Owners Manual. Random and repeat play mode:
While the iPod is playing, the play pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated or played randomly. Random:
Touch the Random key to apply a random play pattern to the iPod. When the random mode is active, the icon is displayed to the left of the song title or album name to denote which random pattern is applied. To cancel Random mode, touch the Random key until no icon is displayed. Repeat:
Touch the Repeat key to apply a repeat play pattern to the iPod. When the repeat mode is icon is displayed to the left of active, the the song title or album name to denote which repeat pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat icon mode, touch the Repeat key until no is displayed. Seek buttons:
Press the seek button backward or forward one track. or to skip or Press and hold the seek button for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played. The track plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the track returns to normal play speed. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 222 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 4. When prompted for a Passkey code, enter 1234 from the handset. The Passkey code 1234 has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed. Audio main operation To switch to the Bluetooth audio mode, press the AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth audio mode is displayed on the screen. Use the vehicle audio controls or the Bluetooth devices controls to play, pause, skip or reverse tracks. BLUETOOTH STREAMING AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(Type B) (if so equipped) If you have a compatible Bluetooth audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the device can be connected to the vehicles audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehicles speakers. BLUETOOTH STREAMING AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(Type A) (if so equipped) If you have a compatible Bluetooth audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the device can be connected to the vehicles audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehicles speakers. Connecting Bluetooth audio To connect your Bluetooth audio device to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the button. The system an-
nounces the available commands. 2. Say Connect Phone. The system acknowl-
edges the command and announces the next set of available commands. 3. Say Add Phone. The system acknowl-
edges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset. The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model. See the cellular phone Owners Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-
tions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones. LHA2279 Scrolling menus:
While navigating long lists of artists, albums or songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll the list by the first character in the name. To activate character indexing, touch and hold the A-Z key in the upper right corner of the screen. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to choose the number or letter to jump to in the list and then press the ENTER button. If no character is selected after two seconds, the display returns to normal. 4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 223 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 LHA2257 LHA2274 LHA2292 Connecting Bluetooth audio To connect your Bluetooth audio device to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the SETTING button. 2. Select the Bluetooth key. 3. Select the Add Telephone or Device key. This same screen can be accessed to re-
move, a different Bluetooth device. replace or select 4. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset. The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model. See the cellular phone Owners Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recom-
mended cellular phones. Audio main operation To switch to the Bluetooth audio mode, press the CDAUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth audio mode is displayed on the screen. The controls for the Bluetooth audio are dis-
played on the screen. Use the Preset 3 button for play and the Preset 4 button for pause. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 224 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 BLUETOOTH STREAMING AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) If you have a compatible Bluetooth audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the device can be connected to the vehicles audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehicles speakers. Connecting Bluetooth audio 3. Select the Phone & Bluetooth key. LHA2253 LHA2248 To connect your Bluetooth audio device to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select the Settings key. 4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 225 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The controls for the Bluetooth audio are dis-
played on the screen. The latest Pandora application should be in-
stalled on the phone. PANDORA AUDIO (United States only) (if so equipped) The vehicles audio system is capable of playing audio streaming through a compatible, USB-
connected audio device using the Pandora mu-
sic service. Connecting a device for use with Pandora audio Devices capable of streaming Pandora audio can be connected to the vehicles audio system via the USB input jack. The USB input jack is located on the center console beneath the heater and air conditioner controls. Once connected, the Pandora controls will be displayed on the control panel display screen. Compatibility The following iPhone models are compatible with the system:
iPhone 3G iPhone 3GS iPhone 4 iPhone 4S LHA2265 4. Select the Connect New Device key. 5. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset. The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model. See the cellular phone Owners Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recom-
mended cellular phones. Audio main operation To switch to the Bluetooth audio mode, press the AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth audio mode is displayed on the screen. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 226 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The controls for the Pandora audio are dis-
played on the screen. Touch the keys on the screen to play or pause the audio. Touch the key key to select to select thumbs up or the thumbs down. NOTE:
There is a limit of six skips per station per
(thumbs down) is given hour. If a after the skip limit has been reached, the current track will continue to play but the feedback will be saved. Models without Navigation System Models with Navigation System:
LHA2283 LHA2269 Audio main operation NOTE:
Models without Navigation System:
To switch to the Pandora audio mode, press the CD-AUX button repeatedly until the Pandora audio mode is displayed on the screen. The controls for the Pandora audio are dis-
played on the screen. Press the audio preset 3 button to pause or play the music. Press the audio preset 5 button to select
(thumbs up). Press the audio preset 4 button to select
(thumbs down). There is a limit of six skips per station per
(thumbs down) is given hour. If a after the skip limit has been reached, the current track will continue to play but the feedback will be saved. Models with Navigation System:
To switch to the Pandora audio mode, press the AUX button repeatedly until the Pandora audio mode is displayed on the screen. 4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 227 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use. A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated. LHA2270 Pandora audio settings (models with Navigation System only) To adjust the Pandora audio settings, select the Menu key. Station List Select to display a list of available Pandora stations. Bookmark Select to bookmark the current station. Delete Station Select to remove the current station. LHA0049 CD CARE AND CLEANING Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the disc. Never touch the surface of the disc. Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used. To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 228 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 SOURCE select switch AM and FM:
Push the source select switch to change the mode in the following sequence:
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station. AM FM1 FM2 XM1 (satellite radio, if so equipped) XM2 (satellite radio, if so equipped) XM3 (satellite radio, if so equipped) CD*
USB/iPod* (if so equipped) Bluetooth Au-
dio* AUX* AM.
* These modes are only available when compat-
ible media storage is inserted into the device or connected to the system. LHA2266 Volume control switch Push the volume control switch to increase or decrease the volume. Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to seek up or down to the next station. Press the ENTER button to show the list of preset stations. XM (if so equipped):
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station. Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to go to the next or previous category. Press the ENTER button to show the XM Menu control switch/ENTER button Menu. iPod (if so equipped):
While the display is showing a map or audio screen, tilt the Menu Control switch upward or downward to select a station, track, CD or folder. For most audio sources, tilting the switch up/down for more than 1.5 seconds provides a different function than a tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds. Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number. Press the ENTER button to show the iPod Menu. CD:
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number.
(Back) switch 1. Source select and power on switch 2. Menu control switch/ENTER button 3. 4. Volume control switch STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped) POWER on switch With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-
tion, push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio system on. 4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 229 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the folder number (if playing compressed audio files). Press the ENTER button to show the CD Menu. USB (if so equipped):
AUX:
Press the ENTER button to show the AUX Menu. ANTENNA Window antenna Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number. The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window. CAUTION Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor recep-
tion or noise. When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth. Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the folder number. Press the ENTER button to show the USB Menu. Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped):
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to skip ahead or back to the next song. Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward the current song. Pandora Audio (if so equipped):
Tilt up for less than 1.5 seconds to input thumbs up for the current song. Tilt down for less than 1.5 seconds to input thumbs down for the current song. Tilt up for more than 1.5 seconds to skip to the next song (if the maximum of six skips per station per hour has not been exceeded). CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts. WARNING A cellular phone should not be used for any purpose while driving so full atten-
tion may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving. If you must make a call while your ve-
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-
lar phone operational mode is highly recommended. Exercise extreme cau-
tion at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 230 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped) CAUTION WARNING Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
control sible from the electronic modules. Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-
trol system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness. Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer. Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. For details, consult a NISSAN dealer. Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine. 4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 231 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the ve-
hicle. NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept connections to other Bluetooth devices. If your phone does not connect automatically to the system, consult the phones Owners Manual for details on device operation. You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time. Before using the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes. Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system. Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized or work properly. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connect-
ing instructions. Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-
patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth wireless technology, you can LHA2289 make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle. Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-
necting procedure is required. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 232 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions:
Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
vice area. Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
tainous area. Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed. When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other persons voice dur-
ing a call. Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption. While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones. If the hands-free phone system seems to be malfunctioning, see Troubleshooting guide in also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help. section. You can this Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise. Refer to the cellular phone Owners Manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc. REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCCs RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions. Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and 2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device. IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
the Canadian Interference-
quirements of Causing Equipment Regulations. BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Vis-
teon. USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth Phone System. If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. 4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 233 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Initialization Giving voice commands When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, button is which takes a few seconds. If the pressed before the initialization completes, the system will announce Hands-free phone system not ready and will not react to voice commands. Operating tips To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe the following:
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly. Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly. Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds. Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words. To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press and release the button located on the steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a command. The command given is picked up by the micro-
phone, and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted. If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again, say Help and the system will repeat them. If a command is not recognized, the system announces, recognized. Please try again. Make sure the command is said exactly as prompted by the system and repeat the command in a clear voice. Command not If you want to go back to the previous com-
mand, you can say Go back or Correc-
tion any time the system is waiting for a response. You can cancel a command when the sys-
tem is waiting for a response by saying, Cancel or Quit. The system announces Cancel and ends the VR session. You can also press and hold the button on the steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-
sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system. If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, press the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume control knob. In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing the button on the steering wheel. To use the system faster, you may speak the second level commands with the main menu command on the main menu. For example, press the button and after the tone say, Call Redial. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 234 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 How to say numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer to the following rules and examples. Either zero or oh can be used for 0. The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more. six six two The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more. Example: 1-800-662-6200 six two zero zero NOTE:
For best results, say phone numbers as single digits. The voice command Help is available at any time. Please use the Help command to get information on how to use the system. Say pound for #. Say star for * (avail-
able when using the Special Number com-
mand and the Send command during a call). See List of voice commands and Special number in this section for more information. Example: 1-555-1212 *123 One five five five one two one two star one two three Say plus for + (available only when using the Special Number command). Say pause for a 2-second pause (available only when storing a phone book number). One eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh, or One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only. Example: 1-800-662-6200 One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh, NOT One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred, and NOT One eight oh oh six six two sixty two hundred Numbers can be spoken in small groups. The system will prompt you to continue en-
tering digits, if desired. Example: 1-800-662-6200 One eight zero zero 4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 235 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 button You can also use the to interrupt the system feedback and give a command at once. See List of voice commands and During a call in this section for more information. PHONE/END While the Voice Recognition sys-
tem is active, press and hold button for 5 seconds to the quit the Voice Recognition system at any time. ENTER button / tuning switch While using the Voice Recogni-
tion system, tilt the tuning switch up or down to manually control the phone system. Press the EN-
TER button to select an option on the display screen. LHA2273 CONTROL BUTTONS The control buttons for the Bluetooth Hands-
Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel. PHONE/SEND Press the a VR session or answer an incom-
ing call. button to initiate GETTING STARTED The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-
ditional command options, refer to List of voice commands in this section. Choosing a language You can interact with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System using English, Spanish or French. To change the language, perform the following. 1. Press and hold the button for more than 5 seconds. 2. The system announces:
Press
) button for the the PHONE/SEND (
hands-free phone system to enter the voice adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END lan-
guage.
) button to select a different 3. Press the button. For information on voice adaptation, see Voice Adaptation (VA) mode in this sec-
tion. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 236 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 4. The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the lan-
guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in French). To select the current language, press the PHONE/SEND (
) button. To select a different language, tilt the tuning switch (
) up or down. or NOTE:
You must press the seconds to change the language. button within 5 5. If you decide not to change the language, do not press either button. After 5 seconds, the VR session will end, and the language will not be changed. Connecting procedure NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be cancelled. Main Menu Connect phone A Add phone B Initiate from handset C Name phone D 1. Press the button on the steering wheel. The system announces the available commands. 2. Say: Connect phone A . The system ac-
knowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands. 3. Say: Add phone B . The system acknowl-
edges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset C . The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model. See the cellular phone Own-
ers Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-
tions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones. When prompted for a Passkey code, enter 1234 from the handset. The Passkey code 1234 has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed. 4. The system asks you to say a name for the phone D . If the name is too long or too short, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again. Also, if more than one phone is connected and the name sounds too much like a name already used, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again. Making a call by entering a phone number Main Menu Call A Phone Number B Speak the digits C Dial D 1. Press the button on the steering wheel. A tone will sound. 2. Say: Call A . The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands. 3. Say Phone Number B . The system ac-
knowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands. 4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 237 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Say: Special Number to dial more than 10 digits or any special characters. 4. Say the number you wish to call starting with the area code in single digit format C . If the system has trouble recognizing the correct phone number, try entering the number in the following groups: 3-digit area code, 3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-
ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as five five five as the 1st group, then one two one as the 2nd group, and three three five four as the 3rd group. For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters, say Special Number. See How to say num-
bers in this section for more information. 5. When you have finished speaking the phone number, the system repeats it back and an-
nounces the available commands. 6. Say: Dial D . The system acknowledges the command and makes the call. NOTE:
If you do not wish to take the call when you hear the ring tone, press the button on the steering wheel. For additional command options, see List of voice commands later in this section. LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS Main Menu Call Phonebook Recent Calls Connect Phone When you press and release the button on the steering wheel, you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu. The following pages describe these commands and the com-
mands in each sub-menu. For additional command options, see List of voice commands in this section. Remember to wait for the tone before speaking. Receiving a call When you hear the ring tone, press the button on the steering wheel. Once the call has ended, press the on the steering wheel. button After the main menu, you can say Help to hear the list of commands currently available any time the system is waiting for a response. end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system. If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say Go back or Correction any time the system is waiting for a response. Call Main Menu Call
(Speak name) A Phone Number
(Speak Digits) B Special Number C Redial D Call Back E
(Speak name) A If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you can dial a number associated with a name and location. See Phonebook in this section to learn how to store entries. If you want to end an action without completing it, you can say Cancel or Quit at any time the system is waiting for a response. The system will When prompted by the system, say the name of the phone book entry you wish to call. The system acknowledges the name. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 238 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 If there are multiple locations associated with the name, the system asks you to choose the loca-
tion. Once you have confirmed the name and location, the system begins the call.
(Speak Digits) B When prompted by the system, say the number you wish to call. Refer to How to say numbers and Making a call by entering a phone number in this section for more details. Special Number C For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters, say Special Number. When the system acknowledges the command, the system will prompt you to speak the number. Redial D Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed. The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing. If a redial number does not exist, the system announces, There is no number to redial and ends the VR session. Call Back E Use the Call Back command to dial the number of the last incoming call within the vehicle. The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing. If a call back number does not exist, the system announces, There is no number to call back and ends the VR session. During a call During a call there are several command options button on the steering available. Press the wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-
mands. Help The system announces the avail-
able commands. Go back/Correction The system an-
nounces Go back, ends the VR session and returns to the call. Cancel/Quit The system announces Cancel, ends the VR session and returns to the call. Send/Enter/Call/Dial Use the Send command to enter numbers, * or # during a call. For example, if you were directed to dial an extension by an automated system:
Say: Send one two three four. 4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers. The system then ends the VR ses-
sion and returns to the call. Say star for *, Say pound for #. Transfer call Use the Transfer Call com-
mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular phone when privacy is desired. The system announces, Transfer call. Call transferred to privacy mode. The system then ends the VR session. To reconnect the call from the cellular phone to the Bluetooth Hands-Free System, press the button. Mute Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it. Use the mute command again to unmute your voice. NOTE:
If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset to off for the next call so the other party can hear your voice. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 239 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Phonebook (phones without automatic phonebook download function) NOTE:
The Transfer Entry command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving. Main Menu Phonebook Transfer Entry A Delete Entry B List Names C For phones that do not support automatic down-
load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth pro-
file), the Phonebook command is used to manu-
ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook. The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each phone connected to the system. NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone As phone-
book if you are currently connected with Phone B. Transfer Entry A Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new name in the system. When prompted by the system, say the name you would like to give the new entry. For example, say: Mary. If the name is too long or too short, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again. Also, if the name sounds too much like a name already stored, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again. The system will ask you to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phones memory. Enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: five five five one two one two. See How to say numbers in this section for more information. To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phones memory:
Say Transfer entry. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset. The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth communication link. The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owners for details. You visit also Manual can www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones. The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command. When you have finished entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose Store. The system confirms the name, number. location and Delete Entry B Use the Delete Entry command to erase one entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-
ognizes the command, speak the name to delete or say List Names to choose an entry. List Names C Use the List Names command to hear all the names in the phonebook. The system recites the phonebook entries but does not include the actual phone numbers. When the playback of the list is complete, the system goes back to the main menu. You can stop the playback of the list at any time button on the steering by pressing the wheel. The system ends the VR session. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 240 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Phonebook (phones with automatic phonebook download function) difficulty recognizing. For more information see Record name in this section. an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice tags can be recorded to the system. NOTE:
NOTE:
The Transfer Entry command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving. Main Menu Phonebook Speak a Name List Names A Record Name B For phones that support automatic download of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth profile), the Phonebook command is used to manage en-
tries in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of that entry. The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for each phone connected to the system. When a phone is connected to the system, the phonebook is automatically downloaded to the vehicle. This feature allows you to access your phonebook from the Bluetooth system and call contacts by name. You can record a custom voice tag for contact names that the system has Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone As phone-
book if you are currently connected with Phone B. List Names A Use the List Names command to hear all the names and locations in the phone book. The system recites the phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers. When the playback of the list is complete, the system goes back to the main menu. You can stop the playback of the list at any time button on the steering by pressing the wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the Record name command in this section for infor-
mation about recording custom voice tags for list entries that the system has difficulty pronounc-
ing. Record Name B The system allows you to record custom voice tags for contact names in the phonebook that the vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can also be used to record voice tags to directly dial 4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Recent Calls Main Menu Recent Calls Outgoing A Incoming B Missed C Use the Recent Calls command to access out-
going, incoming or missed calls. Outgoing A Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing calls made from the vehicle. Incoming B Use the Incoming command to list the incoming calls made to the vehicle. Missed C Use the Missed command to list the calls made to the vehicle that were not answered. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 241 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Connect Phone NOTE:
The Add Phone command is not available when the vehicle is moving. Main Menu Connect Phone Add Phone A Select Phone B Delete Phone C Replace Phone D Bluetooth OFF E Phonebook Download OFF F Display Settings G Use the Connect Phone commands to manage the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable the Bluetooth function on the vehicle. Add Phone A Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to the vehicle. See Connecting procedure in this section for more information. Select Phone B Use the Select Phone command to select from a list of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-
tem will list the names assigned to each phone and then prompt you for the phone you wish to select. Only one phone can be active at a time. Delete Phone C Use the Delete Phone command to delete a phone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys-
tem will list the names assigned to each phone and then prompt you for the phone you wish to delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also delete that phonebook for that phone. Replace Phone D Use the Replace Phone command to replace an existing phone pairing with a new phone. The system will keep all voice tags assigned to your phonebook. Bluetooth OFF E Use the Bluetooth OFF command to prevent a wireless connection to your phone. Phonebook Download OFF F Use the Phonebook Download OFF command to turn off the automatic downloading of the hand-
set phonebook to the available (if supported by the cellular phone). When the command is rec-
ognized, Sync Contacts OFF will appear on the audio display. To turn the feature back on, say Phonebook Download. When the command is recognized, Sync Contacts ON will appear on the audio display. Display Settings G Use the Display Settings command to control where incoming call notifications are displayed in the vehicle. Say Driver Only to have call notifi-
cations shown on the vehicle information display only. Say Both to have call notifications shown on both the vehicle information display and the center audio display. To turn the feature back on, say Phonebook Download. When the command is recognized, Sync Contacts ON will appear on the audio display. VOICE ADAPTATION (VA) MODE Voice Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect users to train the system to improve recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of commands, the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system. The system is capable of storing a different voice adaptation model for each connected phone. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 242 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Training procedure 7. When preparation is complete and you are transfer entry The procedure for training a voice is as follows. 1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location. 2. Sit in the drivers seat with the engine run-
ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-
sion in P (Park). 3. Press and hold the button for more than 5 seconds. 4. The system announces:
Press
) button for the PHONE/SEND (
the hands-free phone system to enter the voice adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END lan-
guage.
) button to select a different 5. Press the button. For information on selecting a different lan-
guage, see Choosing a language in this section. 6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically. If both memory locations are already in use, the system will prompt you to overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-
vided by the system. ready to begin, press the button. 8. The VA mode will be explained. Follow the instructions provided by the system. 9. When training is finished, the system will tell you an adequate number of phrases have been recorded. 10. The system will announce that voice adap-
tation has been completed and the system is ready. The VA mode will stop if:
The button is pressed for more than 5 seconds in VA mode. The vehicle begins moving during VA mode. The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position. Training phrases eight pause nine three two pause seven delete all entries call seven two four zero nine phonebook delete entry next entry dial star two one seven oh yes no select missed dial eight five six nine two Bluetooth on outgoing During the VA mode, the system instructs the trainer to say the following phrases. (The system will prompt you for each phrase.) call three one nine oh two nine seven pause pause three oh eight phonebook transfer entry dial three oh four two nine delete call back number incoming cancel call back number call star two zero nine five delete phone 4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 243 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 To go back to the previous menu, press the PHONE/END (
) button. If the current menu is the Main Menu, pressing the PHONE/END (
) button will exit the Phone system. To exit the manual control mode, press and
) button for 5 hold the PHONE/END (
seconds. dial eight three zero five one MANUAL CONTROL record name four three pause two nine pause zero delete redial number phonebook list names call eight oh five four one correction connect phone dial seven four oh one eight previous entry delete dial nine seven two six six call seven six three oh one go back call five six two eight zero dial six six four three seven While using the Voice Recognition system, it is possible to select menu options by using the steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice commands. The manual control mode does not allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user may select an entry from the Phonebook or Re-
cent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition, exit the manual control mode by pressing and
) button. At that holding the PHONE/END (
time, pressing the PHONE/SEND (
) button will start the Hands Free Phone System. Operating tips To enter manual control mode, start the Voice Recognition system and tilt the tuning
) switch up or down. The system will
speak Showing Manual Options when manual controls are initially activated. To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning
) switch up or down. The system will
always speak the current menu option. De-
pending on the audio display, it will also show the current menu option. To select the current menu option, press the PHONE/SEND (
) button. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 244 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, try the following solutions. Symptom System fails to interpret the command correctly. The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the phone book. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved. Solution 1. Ensure that the command is valid. See List of voice commands in this section. 2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone. 3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized. 5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately. 6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-
prove the recognition response for the speaker. See Voice Adaptation (VA) mode in this section. 1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by using the List Names command. See Phonebook in this section. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name. 4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 245 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (Type B) (if so equipped) WARNING Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine. Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-
patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth wireless technology, you can LHA2290 make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle. Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-
necting procedure is required. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 246 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the ve-
hicle. NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept connections to other Bluetooth devices. If your phone does not connect automatically to the system, consult the phones Owners Manual for details on device operation. You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time. Before using the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes. Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system. Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized or work properly. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connect-
ing instructions. You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions:
Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
vice area. Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
tainous area. Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed. When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other persons voice dur-
ing a call. Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption. While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones. 4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems If the hands-free phone system seems to be malfunctioning, see Troubleshooting guide in also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help. section. You can this Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise. Refer to the cellular phone Owners Manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc. REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCCs RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions. Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and 2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 247 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
the Canadian Interference-
quirements of Causing Equipment Regulations. BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Vis-
teon. USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth Phone System. If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, button is which takes a few seconds. If the pressed before the initialization completes, the system will announce Hands-free phone system not ready and will not react to voice commands. Operating tips To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe the following:
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly. Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly. Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds. Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words. Giving voice commands To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press and release the button located on the steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a command. The command given is picked up by the micro-
phone, and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted. If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again, say Help and the system will repeat them. If a command is not recognized, the system announces, recognized. Please try again. Make sure the command is said exactly as prompted by the system and repeat the command in a clear voice. Command not If you want to go back to the previous com-
mand, you can say Go back or Correc-
tion any time the system is waiting for a response. You can cancel a command when the sys-
tem is waiting for a response by saying, Cancel or Quit. The system announces Cancel and ends the VR session. You can button on the also press and hold the steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-
sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 248 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, press the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume control knob. In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing the button on the steering wheel. To use the system faster, you may speak the second level commands with the main menu command on the main menu. For example, press the button and after the tone say, Call Redial. button You can also use the to interrupt the system feedback and give a command at once. See List of voice commands and During a call in this section for more information. PHONE/END While the voice recognition sys-
tem is active, press and hold button for 5 seconds to the quit the voice recognition system at any time. Tuning switch While using the voice recognition system, tilt the tuning switch up or down to manually control the phone system. CONNECTING PROCEDURE To connect a phone to the Bluetooth Hands-
Free Phone System:
1. Press the SETTING button. LHA2273 CONTROL BUTTONS The control buttons for the Bluetooth Hands-
Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel. PHONE/SEND Press the a VR session or answer an incom-
ing call. button to initiate 4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 249 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 VOICE COMMANDS Voice commands can be used to operate the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. Press the button and say Phone to bring up the phone command menu. The available options are:
Call Phonebook Recent Calls Send Text LHA2257 LHA2274 Read Text 2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select Bluetooth and then press the ENTER but-
ton. 3. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select Add Phone or Device and then press the ENTER button. Select Phone Call 4. When a message with a PIN appears on the screen, operate the Bluetooth phone to enter the PIN. details. The connecting procedure varies according to each phone. See the phones Owners Manual visit for can www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for in-
structions on connecting recommended cellular phones. also You call or For more information on the Call command, see Making a call in this section. Phonebook The following commands are available under Phonebook:
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 250 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
(a name) Transfer Entry Missed Calls Say a name in the phonebook to bring up a list of options for that phonebook entry. The system will say the name it interpreted based on the voice command provided. If the name is incorrect, say Correction to hear another name. Once the correct phonebook entry is identi-
fied, say Dial to dial the number or Send Text to send a text message to that number. Say Record Name to record a name for the phonebook entry. Say Delete Recording to delete a recorded name for the phonebook entry. List Names Speak this command to have the system list the names in the phonebook one by one alphabetically. Say Dial to dial the number of the current name or Send Text to send a text message to that number. Say Next En-
try or Previous Entry to move through the list alphabetically. Say Record Name to record a name for the current phonebook entry. Say Delete Recording to delete a recorded name for the current phonebook entry. This command can be used to transfer mul-
tiple contacts at a time. To enable manual contact transfer capability, set Phonebook Download to Off in the Setting menu. The ability to transfer contacts via the OPP Bluetooth profile depends on your mobile phone. See your phones Owners Manual for details and instructions. Delete Entry Speak this command to delete an entry in the phonebook. Choose an entry to delete by speaking the desired name or say List Names. Recent Calls The following commands are available under Recent Calls:
Incoming Calls Speak this command to list the last five incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is from an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the incoming call will be dis-
played. Say Dial to call the number or Send Text to send a text message to that number. Say Next Entry or Previous Entry to move through the list of incoming calls. 4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Speak this command to list the last five missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the missed call will be displayed. Say Dial to call the number or Send Text to send a text message to that number. Say Next Entry or Previous Entry to move through the list of missed calls. Outgoing Calls Speak this command to list the last five outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call was to an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the outgoing call will be dis-
played. Say Dial to call the number or Send Text to send a text message to that number. Say Next Entry or Previous Entry to move through the list of outgoing calls. Redial Speak this command to call the last number dialed. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 251 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Call Back Number Speak this command to place a Speak this command to call the number of the last incoming call to the vehicle. Send Text / Read Text For more information on these commands, see Text messaging in this section. Select Phone Speak this command to select a phone to use from a list of those phones connected to the vehicle. MAKING A CALL To make a call from a phone connected to the vehicles Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System:
Press the button. The system will prompt you for a command. Select one of the available voice commands to continue:
(a name) Speak the name of a phone-
book entry to place a call to that entry. The system will respond with the name it inter-
preted from your command and will prompt you to confirm that the name is correct. Say Yes to initiate the call or No to hear an-
other name from the phonebook. call by inputting numbers. For 7- and 10-digit phone numbers, speak the numbers. When finished, say Dial to initiate the call. Say Correction at any time in the process to correct a misspoken or misinterpreted number. For phone numbers with more digits or spe-
cial characters, say Special Number, then speak the digits. Up to 24 digits can be entered. Available special characters are star, pound, plus and pause. When finished, say Dial to initiate the call. Say Correction at any time in the process to correct a misspoken or misinterpreted num-
ber or character. Redial Speak this command to dial the number of the last outgoing call. The system will display Redialing <name/number>. The name of the phonebook entry will be displayed if it available, otherwise the num-
ber being redialed will be displayed. Call Back Speak this command to dial the number of the last incoming call. The system will display Calling back <name/number.. The name of the phonebook entry will be displayed if it available, otherwise the num-
ber being called back will be displayed. LHA2293 RECEIVING A CALL When a call is received by the phone connected to the vehicles Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System, the call information is displayed on either the vehicle information display or both the vehicle information display and he control panel display. Press the the button to accept the call. Press button to reject the call. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 252 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Transfer Call Speak this command to transfer the call to the handset. To transfer the call back from the handset to the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System, button and confirm when press the prompted. If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System allows for call waiting functionality. If a call is received while another call is already active, a message will be displayed on button to hold the the screen. Press the active call and switch to the second call. Press the button to reject the second call. is active, pressing While the second call the button will allow the same commands that available during any call as well as two addi-
tional commands:
Switch Call Speak this command to hold the second call and switch back to the origi-
nal call. End Other Call Speak this command to stay with the second call and end the original call. Press the the button to accept the call. Press button to reject the call. ENDING A CALL To end an active call, press the button. TEXT MESSAGING WARNING Use the text messaging feature after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use the feature while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using the text messaging feature, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. NOTE:
This feature is automatically disabled if the connected device does not support the Message Access Profile (MAP). See the phones Owners Manual for details and instructions. The system allows for the sending and receiving of text messages through the vehicle interface. LHA2294 DURING A CALL While a call is active, press the button to access additional options. Speak one of the fol-
lowing commands:
(numbers) Speak numbers and then say Send or say Correction to change the numbers entered. Mute On or Mute Off Speak the com-
mand to mute or unmute the system. 4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 253 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Sending a text message:
1. Press the button. 2. Say Send Text. 3. The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine the recipi-
ent of the text message. Choose from the following:
(a name) Number Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls Missed Calls For more information about these options, see Voice commands in this section. To send one of the custom messages, say Custom Message. If more than one cus-
tom message is stored, the system will prompt for the number of the desired cus-
tom message. For more information on set-
ting and managing custom text messages, see Bluetooth settings in this section. LHA2296 4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system prompts for which message to send. Five predefined messages are available as well as three custom messages. To choose one of the predefined messages, speak one of the following:
Driving, cant text Call me On my way Running late Okay Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 254 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Call Back Speak this command to call the sender of the text message using the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. Send Text Speak this command to send a text message response to the sender of the text message. Read Text Speak this command to read the text mes-
sage again. Previous Text Speak this command to move to the previ-
ous text message (if available). Next Text Speak this command to move to the next text message (if available). NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph. LHA2257 BLUETOOTH SETTINGS To access and adjust Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System:
the settings for the 1. Press the SETTING button. Reading a received text message:
LHA2295 1. Press the button. 2. Say Read Text. The text message, sender and delivery time are shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch on the steering wheel to scroll through all text mes-
sages if more than one are available. Press the button to exit the text message screen. button to access the following Press the options for replying to the text message:
4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 255 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 LHA2274 2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select Bluetooth and then press the ENTER but-
ton:
Bluetooth Select On or Off to turn the vehicles Bluetooth system on or off. Add Phone or Device To connect a phone to the system, see Connecting procedure in this section. Delete Phone or Device Select to delete a phone from the displayed list. The system will ask to confirm before deleting the phone. Replace Phone New Text Sound Select to replace a phone from the displayed list. When a selection is made, the system will ask to confirm before proceeding. The recorded phonebook for the phone being deleted will be saved as long as the new phones phonebook is the same as the old phones phonebook. Select Phone or Device Select to connect to a previously connected phone from the displayed list. Show Incoming Calls Select Driver Only to have incoming call information displayed only in the vehicle in-
formation display. Select Both to have in-
coming call information displayed in both the vehicle information display and the center display screen. Phonebook Download Select to turn on or off the automatic down-
load of a connected phones phonebook. Text Message Select to turn on or off the vehicles text messaging feature. Select to adjust the volume of the sound that plays when a new text is received by a phone connected to the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. The setting all the way to the left indicates that the new text sound will be muted. Show Incoming Text Select Driver Only to have incoming text messages displayed only in the vehicle infor-
mation display. Select Both to have incom-
ing text messages displayed in both the ve-
hicle information display and the center display screen. Select None to have no display of incoming text messages. Edit Custom Messages Select to set a custom message that will be available with the standard options when sending a text message. To set a custom message, send a text message to your own phone number while the phone is connected to the system. Three custom messages can be set. Custom messages can only be set while the vehicle is stationary. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 256 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Auto Reply Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply func-
tion. When enabled, the vehicle will auto-
matically send a predefined text message to the sender when a text message is received while driving. Auto Reply Message Select to choose the message that is sent when the Auto Reply function is enabled. Choose from Im Driving or one of the three custom messages stored in the system. Vehicle Signature On/Off Select to choose whether or not the mes-
sage Sent from my Altima is added to outgoing text messages from the vehicle. This message cannot be changed or cus-
tomized. MANUAL CONTROL While using the Voice Recognition system, it is possible to select menu options by using the steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice commands. The manual control mode does not allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user may select an entry from the Phonebook or Re-
cent Calls lists. To re-activate Voice Recognition, exit the manual control mode by pressing and holding the PHONE/END (
) button. At that time, pressing the PHONE/SEND (
) button will start the Hands Free Phone System. BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped) WARNING Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine. 4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 257 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle. You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time. NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the phone commands, so dialing a phone number using your voice is possible. For more details, see NISSAN Voice Recognition System in this sec-
tion. Before using the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes. Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system. Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-
patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth wireless technology, you can LHA2291 make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle. Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-
necting procedure is required. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting. module. Please You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions:
Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
vice area. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 258 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive cellular signal; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
tainous area. Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed. When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other persons voice dur-
ing a call. Immediately after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, it may be impos-
sible to receive a call for a short period of time. Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption. While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones. If the hands-free phone system seems to be malfunctioning, see Troubleshooting guide in also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help. section. You can this Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise. Refer to the cellular phone owners manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc. The signal strength display on the monitor will not coincide with the signal strength display of some cellular phones. REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCCs RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions. Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and 2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device. IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
the Canadian Interference-
quirements of Causing Equipment Regulations. BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Visteon. VOICE COMMANDS You can use voice commands to operate various Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System features using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For more details, see NISSAN Voice Recognition System in this section. 4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 259 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CONNECTING PROCEDURE 1. Press the MENU button on the control panel. 2. Select the Settings key. 3. Select the Phone & Bluetooth key. LHA2253 LHA2248 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 260 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 LHA2265 LHA2297 LHA2279 4. Select the Connect New Device key. VEHICLE PHONEBOOK 5. Initiate the connecting process from the handset. The system will display the mes-
sage: Is PIN XXXXXX displayed on your Bluetooth device?. If the PIN is displayed on your Bluetooth device, select Yes to complete the connecting process. For more information, see the Bluetooth de-
vices Owners Manual. To access the vehicle phonebook:
1. Press the button on the control panel. 2. Select the Phonebook key. 3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed list. NOTE:
To scroll quickly through the list, touch the A-Z key in the upper right corner of the screen. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to choose a letter or number and then press ENTER. The list will move to the first entry that begins with that number or letter. 4. The number of the entry will be displayed on the screen. Touch the number to initiate di-
aling. 4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 261 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Redial: Dial the last outgoing call from the vehicle.
: Input the phone number manually using a keypad displayed on the screen. For information on how to use the touchscreen, see How to use the touchscreen in this section. MAKING A CALL To make a call, follow the procedure below:
LHA2297 1. Press the button on the instrument panel. The Phone screen will appear on the display. 2. Select one of the following options to make a call:
Phonebook: Select the name from an entry stored in the vehicle phonebook. Call Lists: Select the name from the in-
coming, outgoing or missed call history. LHA2298 RECEIVING A CALL When a call is placed to the connected phone, the display will change to phone mode. To accept the incoming call, either:
Press the wheel, or button on the steering Touch the green phone icon on the screen. To reject the incoming call, either:
Press the wheel, or button on the steering Touch the red phone icon on the screen. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 262 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 ENDING A CALL To end a phone call, select the red phone (
icon on the screen or press the the steering wheel.
) button on LHA2299 DURING A CALL While a call is active, the following options are available on the screen:
Handset Select this option to switch control of the phone call over to the handset. Mute Mic. Select this option to mute the microphone. Select again to unmute the microphone. Red phone (
) icon Select to end the phone call. 4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems TEXT MESSAGING LHA2300 WARNING Use the text messaging feature after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use the feature while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using the text messaging feature, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 263 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The system allows for the sending and receiving of text messages through the vehicle interface. Sending a text message:
1. Press the button. 2. Say Send Text. 3. The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine the recipi-
ent of the text message. Choose from the following:
On my way Running late Okay To send one of the custom messages, say Custom Messages. If more than one cus-
tom message is stored, the system will prompt for the number of the desired cus-
tom message. For more information on set-
ting and managing custom text messages, see Bluetooth settings in this section.
(a name) Number Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls Missed Calls For more information about these options, see Voice commands in this section. 4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system prompts for which message to send. Five predefined messages are available as well as three custom messages. To choose one of the predefined messages, speak one of the following:
Driving, cant text Call me Reading a received text message:
LHA2301 1. Press the button. 2. Say Read Text. The text message, sender and delivery time are shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to scroll through all text messages if more than one are avail-
button to exit the text message able. Press the screen. Press the button to access the follow-
ing options for replying to the text message:
Call Back Speak this command to call the sender of the text message using the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 264 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Send Text Speak this command to send a text message response to the sender of the text message. Read Text Speak this command to read the text mes-
sage again. Previous Text Speak this command to move to the previ-
ous text message (if available). Next Text Speak this command to move to the next text message (if available). NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph. LHA2253 LHA2248 3. Select the Phone & Bluetooth key. BLUETOOTH SETTINGS To access the phone settings:
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select the Settings key. 4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 265 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Replace Connected Device Select to replace a Bluetooth device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. Delete Connected Device Select to delete a Bluetooth device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. Bluetooth Select to toggle the Bluetooth on and off. LHA2265 Phone Settings See Phone settings in this section for more information. Connect New Device Select to connect a new Bluetooth device to the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys-
tem. Select Connected Device Select to choose a Bluetooth device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. LHA2302 PHONE SETTINGS To access the phone settings:
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select the Settings key. 3. Select the Phone & Bluetooth key. 4. Select the Phone Settings key and adjust the following settings as desired:
Sort Phonebook By:
Select First Name or Last Name to choose how phonebook entries are alpha-
betically displayed on the screen. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 266 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Use Phonebook From:
Show Incoming Text for Select Handset to use the phones phone-
book. Select SIM to use the phonebook on the SIM card. Select Both to use both sources. Download Phonebook Now Select to download the phonebook to the vehicle from the chosen source. Phone Notifications for Select Driver to have phone notifications shown in the vehicle information display. Se-
lect Both to have phone notifications shown in both the vehicle information display and the center display screen. Record Name for Phonebook Entry Select to record a name for a phonebook entry for use with the NISSAN Voice Recog-
nition System. Text Message Service Select to toggle the text message function-
ality on or off. Select Driver to have text message notifi-
cations shown in the vehicle information dis-
play. Select Both to have text message notifications shown in both the vehicle infor-
mation display and the center display screen. Select None to have text message notifications not displayed. SMS Auto Reply Function Select to toggle the SMS auto reply func-
tionality on or off. SMS Auto Reply Message Select to choose a message that is sent when the auto reply function is activated. Add Vehicles Signature Select to toggle on or off the addition of the vehicle signature to outgoing messages. Predefined SMS Messages Select the predefined SMS messages that are used by the system. NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (if so equipped) The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands-free operation of the systems equipped on this vehicle, such as the phone and navigation systems. To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press the button located on the steering wheel. When prompted, speak the command for the system you wish to activate. The command given is picked up by the microphone and performed when it is properly recognized. NISSAN Voice Recognition will provide a voice response as well as a message in the center display to inform you of the command results. USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. When completed, the sys-
tem is ready to accept voice commands. If the button is pressed before the initializa-
tion completes, the system will announce: Voice Recognition System not ready. Please wait. 4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 267 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 If the command is not recognized, the sys-
tem announces: Command not recog-
nized. Repeat the command in a clear voice. If you want to cancel the command or go back to the previous menu of commands, button. The system will an-
press the nounce: Voice recognition canceled or Go back depending on the current menu level. Press the button to move back through the menus displayed on the screen. If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, use the volume control switches on the steering wheel or the volume knob on the control panel. LHA2282 Giving voice commands 1. Press the button. 2. The system announces: Please say a com-
mand. A list of available commands is spo-
ken by the system. 3. After the tone sounds and the face icon on the display changes, speak a command. Available commands are discussed later in this section. 4. Voice and display feedback are provided when the command is accepted. LHA2253 The voice command screen can also be accessed using the control panel display:
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select the Voice Commands key. Operating tips To get the best performance out of NISSAN Voice Recognition, observe the following:
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands cor-
rectly. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 268 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly. Start speaking a command within 3.5 sec-
onds after the tone sounds. Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words. How to say numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer to the following examples. General rule: Either zero or oh can be used for 0. Phone numbers Speak phone numbers according to the following example. For 1-800-662-6200, say dial number and then speak the phone number in any of the following formats:
LHA2281 one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh SYSTEM FEATURES NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the fol-
lowing systems:
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System Navigation Audio Information For additional information on the navigation sys-
tem, see the separate Navigation System Own-
ers Manual. one eight hundred six six two six two oh oh one eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh For the best voice recognition phone dialing re-
sults, say phone numbers as single digits. Also, full numbers can only be spoken for 800. For example, you cannot say 555-6000 as five five five six thousand. 4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 269 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS To access the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System voice commands:
1. Press the button. 2. Say Call and then a name in the vehicle phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise, say Phone to access various phone com-
mands. If the Bluetooth has been set to Off, the sys-
tem announces: Bluetooth is off. Would you like to turn Bluetooth on?
If no phone is connected to the system and the vehicle is stationary, the system announces:
There is no phone connected. Would you like to connect a phone now? Say Yes to connect a phone. All further Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System voice commands are only available if a phone is connected. If a phone is connected and Bluetooth is set to On, the following voice commands are avail-
able:
dialing. Say Correction to correct the num-
ber entered. Say Go Back to return to the main menu. List Phonebook Reads an incoming text message. For more information about text messaging with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System, see Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System in this section. Starting with the first alphabetical entry in the vehicle phonebook, the system prompts for an additional command. Say Dial to call the number of the phonebook entry. Say Send Text to send a text message to the number of the phonebook entry. Say Next Entry to skip to the next alphabetical entry in the vehicle phonebook, where the same op-
tions will then be available. Recent Calls The system prompts for an additional com-
mand. Say Missed Calls, Incoming Calls or Outgoing Calls to display a list of such calls on the screen. Speak the number of the entry displayed on the screen to dial that number or say Next Page to view entries on the next page (if available). Redial Send Text Sends a text message. For more information about text messaging with the Bluetooth Hands-Free see Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System in this section. System, Phone Select Phone The system replies Please use manual con-
trols to continue. Use manual controls to change the active phone from among the listed phones connected to the vehicle. For more information about the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System, see Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation Sys-
tem in this section. Dial Number Redials the last called number. Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed. After the number is entered, say Dial to initiate Read Text Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 270 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 XM (satellite radio, if so equipped) Podcasts*
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS The following voice commands are available for the Navigation System:
Places Street Address Address Book Home Previous Destination For more information about these commands, see the separate Navigation System Owners Manual. AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS To access the audio system voice commands:
1. Press the button. 2. Say Audio 3. Speak a command from the following avail-
able commands:
FM Switches the audio system to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio mode. CD Switches the audio system to the CD mode. A CD must be inserted for this command to be functional. iPod Switches the audio system to the iPod mode. An iPod must be connected for this command to be available and functional. The following sub-commands are available for iPod:
Now Playing Menu Playlists Artists Albums Genres Songs Switches the audio system to the FM mode. Shuffle Songs*
AM Composers*
Switches the audio system to the AM mode. Audiobooks*
4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
* Say Next Page to access these com-
mands. Say Previous Page to return to the first page of commands. USB Switches the audio system to the USB mode. A USB device must be inserted for this command to be available and functional. Pandora Switches the audio system to the Pandora audio mode. A compatible Bluetooth audio device with a Pandora application must be connected to the system for this command to be functional. Bluetooth the audio system to Switches the Bluetooth audio mode. A compatible Bluetooth audio device must be connected to the system for this command to be func-
tional. AUX Switches the audio system to the AUX mode. An AUX device must be connected for this command to be functional. For more information about the audio system, see Audio system in this section. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 271 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS The following voice commands are available for the information functions of the Navigation Sys-
tem:
Traffic Current Weather Weather Forecast Google Send-To-Car POIs Powered by Google For more information about these commands, see the separate Navigation System Owners Manual. HELP VOICE COMMANDS The following voice commands can be spoken to have the system provide instructions and tips for using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. List Commands What Can I Say?
General Help Quit Exit Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 272 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved. Symptom/error message The system responds Command Not Recognized or the system fails to rec-
ognize the command correctly. Solution 1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the List Commands or What Can I Say? command under the Help menu. 2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level. 3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on). NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place. 4. 4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 273 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 5 Starting and driving Precautions when starting and driving. 5-2 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . 5-2 Three-way catalyst. 5-2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). 5-3 Avoiding collision and rollover . 5-6 Off-road recovery. 5-6 Rapid air pressure loss . 5-7 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. 5-8 Push-Button Ignition Switch . 5-8 Operating range. 5-9 Ignition switch positions . 5-9 Emergency engine shut off . 5-10 NISSAN Intelligent Key battery discharge . 5-10 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . 5-11 Before starting the engine . 5-11 Starting the engine . 5-12 Remote start (if so equipped) . 5-12 Driving the vehicle . 5-13 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). 5-13 Parking brake . 5-19 Cruise control (if so equipped) . 5-19 Precautions on cruise control . 5-19 Cruise control operations. 5-19 Break-in schedule . 5-20 Increasing fuel economy. 5-21 Parking/parking on hills. 5-22 Power steering system . 5-23 Brake system . 5-23 Brake precautions . 5-23 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). 5-24 Brake assist . 5-25 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . 5-25 Cold weather driving . 5-27 Freeing a frozen door lock . 5-27 Anti-freeze . 5-27 Battery . 5-27 Draining of coolant water . 5-27 Tire equipment . 5-27 Special winter equipment. 5-28 Driving on snow or ice . 5-28 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . 5-28 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 274 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys. EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) WARNING Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. 5-2 Starting and driving If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all win-
dows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage. Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time. Keep the rear vent windows, lift gates, doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passen-
ger compartment. If you must drive with one of follow these precautions:
these open, 1. Open all the windows. 2. Set the air recirculation but-
ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air. If electrical wiring or other cable con-
nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturers recommen-
dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-
try into the vehicle. The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are passenger into the entering compartment. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, un-
derbody, or rear of the vehicle. THREE-WAY CATALYST The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants. WARNING The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
tem are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 275 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. CAUTION Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously re-
duce the three-way catalysts ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants. Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-
able loss of performance or other un-
usual are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer. conditions operating Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and in-
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicles tire and loading information label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle tire and loading information label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pres-
sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-
ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. Additional information:
The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire. Starting and driving 5-3 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 276 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving). The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted on all 4 tires. After all 4 tires are inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning appears in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off. The Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction. Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicles operation and the outside temperature. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-
nate. If the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature, check the tire pres-
sure for all four tires. The Tire and Loading Information label (also referred to as the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label) is located in the drivers door opening. You can also check the tire pressure of all tires (expect the spare) on the vehicle infor-
mation display screen (if so equipped). The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen corresponds with the actual order of the tire position. For additional information, see Low tire pressure warning light in the Instruments and controls section, Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) in the In case of emergency section and Tire Pressure in the Maintenance and do-
it-yourself section. WARNING Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac-
turer for the possible influences before use. If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci-
dent and could result in serious per-
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the tire and loading informa-
tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (See Flat tire in the In case of emergency section for changing a flat tire.) 5-4 Starting and driving REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 277 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Some examples are:
For Canada:
Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle. If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is This device complies with RSS-210 of In-
dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
being used in or near the vehicle. 1. This device may not cause interfer-
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. FCC Notice:
For USA:
Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. CAUTION Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly. Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-
minate. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful in-
terference, and 2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modification not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the us-
ers the equipment. authority operate to ence, and 2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence, include interference that may cause undesired operation of the de-
vice. TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. Vehicle set-up:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place. 2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift selector to the P (Park) position. 3. Place the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not start the engine. Starting and driving 5-5 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 278 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Operation:
1. Add air to the tire. 2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing. 3. When the designated pressure is reached, the horn beeps once and the hazard indica-
tors stop flashing. 4. Perform the above steps for each tire. If the tire is over-inflated more than ap-
the horn proximately 4 psi (30 kPa), beeps and the hazard indicators flash 3 times. To correct the pressure, push the core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to release pressure. When the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps once. If the hazard indicator does not flash within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not operating. The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill Tire Alert under the following conditions:
If there is interference from an external device or transmitter. The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire. 5-6 Starting and driving There is a malfunction in the TPMS sys-
tem. There is a malfunction in the horn or haz-
ard indicators. The identification code of the tires pres-
sure sensor is not registered to the sys-
tem. The battery of the tire pressure sensor is low. If the Easy Fill Tire Alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the ve-
hicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward and try again. If the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire pressure gauge. AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-
scription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so. Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-
sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt. WARNING OFF-ROAD RECOVERY Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-
neuvers, because these driving practices could If the right side or left side wheels unintentionally leave the road surface, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic. 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 279 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 2. Do not apply the brakes. 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course. 4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-
hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-
hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced. 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-
propriate driving lane. If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road. RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS Rapid air pressure loss or a blow-out can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires. Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds. Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-
ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage. See Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or blows-out while driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the ve-
hicle, road and traffic. WARNING The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury. The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire. Do not rapidly apply the brakes. Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal. Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel. 1. Remain calm and do not over react. 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course. 3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible. 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle. 6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and either contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire or see Changing a flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual. Starting and driving 5-7 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 280 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING WARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-
duces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury. NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-
though the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving dont mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-
scription, and illegal drugs). Dont drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-
hol, drugs, or some other physical condition. 5-8 Starting and driving PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH WARNING Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecu-
tive times in quick succession or the igni-
tion switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury. When the ignition switch is pushed without de-
pressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will illuminate. LSD2014 Push the ignition switch center:
once to change to ACC. two times to change to ON. three times to return to OFF. The ignition switch will automatically return to the LOCK position when any door is either opened or closed with the switch in the OFF position. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 281 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be switched to OFF until the shift selector is moved to the P (Park) posi-
tion. When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to-
ward the OFF position, proceed as follows:
1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park) position. 2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch position will change to the ON position. 3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF position. The shift selector can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed. If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the push-button ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position. Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the vehicle information display. See Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual. The operating range of the engine start function is inside of the vehicle 1 . The luggage area is not included in the op-
erating range, but the Intelligent Key may function. If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instru-
ment panel, inside the glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not function. If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function. LSD2089 IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range. When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-
charged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key sys-
tems operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly. If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to turn the ignition switch to start the engine. LOCK (Normal parking position) :
The ignition switch can only be locked in the LOCK position. The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is placed in the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key. OFF:
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch. Starting and driving 5-9 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 282 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 ACC (Accessories) :
This position activates electrical accessories, such as the radio, when the engine is not running. ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the ignition switch to the OFF position after 30 min-
utes under the following conditions:
all doors are closed shift selector is in P (Park) any door is opened shift selector is moved out of P (Park) ignition switch changes position ON (Normal operating position) :
This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories. CAUTION Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an extended pe-
riod. This can discharge the battery. 5-10 Starting and driving EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3 consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds. SSD0860 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key is discharged, or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine according to the following procedure:
1. Place the shift selector in the P (Park) posi-
tion. 2. Firmly apply the foot brake. 3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.) REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 283 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sounds. The engine will start. After step 3 is performed, when the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change to ACC. NOTE:
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position or the engine is started by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears in the vehicle information display even when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again. If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indi-
cator appears, replace the battery as soon as possible. See NISSAN Intelligent Key replacement in the Maintenance and do-it-
yourself section. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key. If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key. If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least when-
ever you refuel. Check that all windows and lights are clean. Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation. Lock all doors. Position seat and adjust head restraints. Adjust inside and outside mirrors. Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise. Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. See Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section of this manual. Starting and driving 5-11 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 284 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 STARTING THE ENGINE 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector is in any of the driving positions. 3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal and push the igni-
tion switch to start the engine. To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position. If the engine is very hard to start in ex-
tremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-
proximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts. If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion to start cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to LOCK. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the 5-12 Starting and driving accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the push-button ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged. 4. Warm-up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-
onds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the en-
gine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start. 5. To stop the engine, shift the shift selector to the P (Park) position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position. NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone char-
gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.) 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health. REMOTE START (if so equipped) Vehicles started with the remote start require the ignition switch to be placed in the ON position before the shift selector can be moved from the P
(Park) position. To place the ignition switch to the ON position, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you. 2. Apply the brake. 3. Press the ignition switch once to the ON position. For additional information, see NISSAN Intelli-
gent Key in the Pre-driving checks and adjust-
ments section of this manual. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 285 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 DRIVING THE VEHICLE CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) WARNING Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), Ds (Drive Sport) or manual shift mode (if so equipped). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Fail-
ure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving. This could cause an accident. Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Doing so can cause a loss of engine braking which may result in a collision, serious personal injury or death. In ad-
dition, coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission. CAUTION When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depress-
ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose. The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-
trolled to produce maximum power and smooth operation. The CVT can operate in two different automatic drive modes:
D (Drive) mode - Move the shift selector to D
(Drive), the transmission is in the normal forward automatic driving mode. The posi-
tion indicator in the meter shows a D. The D (Drive) mode does not produce a gear change sensation like a traditional automatic transmission. Ds (Drive Sport) mode - Move the shift se-
lector from D (Drive) to the to Ds (Drive Sport). The position indicator in the meter shows a Ds. In Ds (Drive Sport) mode, transmission operation changes to Sporty driving shift operation, creating a more ag-
gressive acceleration feeling than the D
(Drive) mode and a gear change sensation when the driver accelerates or when using the shift paddles (if so equipped). During Ds
(Drive Sport) mode operation, the driver must move the shift selector from Ds mode to D mode and back again to re-select Ds
(Drive Sport) mode. To cancel the Ds mode, return the shift se-
lector to the D (Drive) position. The trans-
mission returns to the automatic drive mode. The CVT can operate in two manual drive modes:
M (Manual) mode (if so equipped) - With the shift selector in the Ds (Drive Sport) mode, using the shift paddles (if so equipped) up
(+) or down () produces noticeable up-
shifts and downshifts. The position indicator in the meter shows a M. To Ds (Drive Sport) mode return the shift selector to the D (Drive) mode. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment. Starting and driving 5-13 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 286 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 NOTE:
Engine power may be automatically re-
duced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers. Starting the vehicle 1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift selector out of the P (Park) position. 2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift selector into a driving gear. 3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion. 4. Stop the vehicle completely before shifting the shift selector to the P (Park) position. The CVT is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position. The shift selector cannot be moved out of P
(Park) and into any of the other gear posi-
tions if the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK position. 5-14 Starting and driving WARNING Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-
tor is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage. P (Park):
CAUTION To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped. LSD2085 To move the shift selector:
Press the button A while depressing the brake pedal Press the buttonA to shift Shift without pressing button A Shifting After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector from P (Park) to any of the desired shift positions. Use the P (Park) shift selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift selector from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the shift selector into the P (Park) position. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 287 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 R (Reverse):
CAUTION To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped. Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift selector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse). N (Neutral):
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive):
Use this position for all normal forward driving. Ds (Drive Sport):
When the shift selector is shifted from the D
(Drive) to Ds (Drive Sport) position, the transmis-
sion enters the Ds (Drive Sport) mode. Moving the shift selector to the Ds (Drive Sport) position allows you to enjoy sporty driving shift operation on a winding road and feel smooth acceleration or deceleration on a hilly road by moving in a lower gear automatically. When canceling the DS mode, return the shift selector to the D (Drive) position. The transmission returns to the normal driving mode. LSD2086 Manual shift mode (if so equipped) When the shift selector is in the Ds (Drive Sport) position, the transmission is ready for the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu-
ally by pulling the right-side or left-side paddle shifter. When shifting up, pull the right side paddle shifter (+) C (if so equipped). The transmission shifts to the higher range. When shifting down, pull the left side paddle shifter () B (if so equipped). The transmission shifts to the lower range. Starting and driving 5-15 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 288 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
sion may shift up automatically to a higher range than selected if the en-
gine speed is too high. When the ve-
hicle speed decreases, the transmis-
sion automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop. CVT operation is limited to automatic drive mode when CVT fluid temperature is ex-
tremely low even if manual shift mode is selected. This is not a malfunction. When CVT fluid warms up, manual mode can be selected. When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the shift range may upshift in lower rpm than usual. This is not a malfunction. When canceling the manual shift mode, return the selector lever to the D (Drive) position. The transmission returns to the normal driving mode. When you pull the paddle shifter (if so equipped) while in the D (Drive) position, the transmission will shift to the upper or lower range temporarily. The transmission will automatically return to the D
(Drive) position after a short period of time. If you want to return to the D (Drive) position manually, pull and hold the paddle shifter for about 1.5 seconds. In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis-
played on the position indicator in the meter. Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 M8 (8th) and M7 (7th):
Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds. M6 (6th) and M5 (5th):
Use this position when driving up long slopes, or for engine braking when driving down long slopes. M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd):
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. 5-16 Starting and driving M1 (First):
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades. Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than 7 range. This reduces fuel economy. When shifting up:
Move the shift selector to the + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.) When shifting down:
Move the shift selector to the (down) side.
(Shifts to lower range.) Moving the shift selector rapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession. When canceling the manual shift mode:
Return the shift selector to the D (Drive) position to return the transmission to the normal driving mode. In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
sion may not shift to the selected gear. This helps maintain driving perfor-
mance and reduces the chance of ve-
hicle damage or loss of control. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 289 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a 3 mm screwdriver, remove the shift lock release cover. If available, a plastic trim tool can also be used. 4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down. 5. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock release. Shift lock release LSD2087 If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P
(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the trans-
mission as soon as possible. If the battery charge is low or discharged, the shift selector may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed and the shift selector button pushed. It will be necessary to jump start or have your battery charged, see Jump starting in the In case of emergency section. Contact your NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service. To move the shift selector, complete the following procedure:
1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion. WARNING If the shift selector cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-
ing stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. LSD2090 Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch (if so equipped) When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with the shift selector in the D (Drive) position, the light in the instrument panel illuminates. See Overdrive off indicator light in the Instruments and controls section of this manual. Use the Overdrive off mode when you need im-
proved engine braking. To turn off the Overdrive off mode, push the O/D OFF switch again. The indicator light will turn off. Starting and driving 5-17 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 290 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Each time the engine is started, or when the shift selector is shifted to any position other than D
(Drive), the Overdrive off mode will be automati-
cally turned off. Accelerator downshift in D position For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-
erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-
sion down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed. High fluid temperature protection mode This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-
comes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited. Fail-safe If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-
ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe 5-18 Starting and driving system may be activated. The MIL may come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is activated, see Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) in the Instrument and controls sec-
tion. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds. Then push the switch back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal op-
erating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary. WARNING 1. To engage, firmly depress the foot brake. LSD0158 When the high fluid temperature protec-
tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially care-
ful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal op-
eration, or have it repaired if necessary. 2. To release:
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 291 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 PARKING BRAKE CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped) WARNING Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle. Do not use the shift selector in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged. Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident. The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control switch is turned ON while pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise control system, use the following proce-
dures. WARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:
When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed. In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. On winding or hilly roads. On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). In very windy areas. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-
tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the ONOFF switch on. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument panel will illuminate. Starting and driving 5-19 LSD2088 1. CANCEL switch 2. ACCEL/RES switch 3. COAST/SET switch 4. ON/OFF switch PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The SET indicator light in the instrument panel then blinks to warn the driver. If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the cruise control switch off and have the sys-
tem checked by a NISSAN dealer. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 292 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 BREAK-IN SCHEDULE CAUTION During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and en-
sure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in short-
ened engine life and reduced engine performance. Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. Avoid quick starts. Avoid hard braking as much as possible. Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed. To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-
celerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch. Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you de-
sire, release the switch. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control. Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do this, the set speed in-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods. To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods. Push the CANCEL button. Tap the brake pedal. Push the ONOFF switch off. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument panel goes out. The cruise control is automatically canceled if:
you depress the brake pedal while pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory. the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH
(13 km/h) below the set speed. you move the shift selector to N (Neutral). 5-20 Starting and driving Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
hicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-
lease the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed. Push and release the COAST/SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed de-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and re-
lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-
turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h). REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 293 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position. When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag. Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. See recommended fuel/lubricants in the Technical and con-
sumer information section of this manual. Capacities and Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy. Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-
hicles. Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible. Avoid unnecessary engine idling. Keep your engine tuned up. Follow the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule. Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-
sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-
proper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. Air conditioner operation fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary. lowers Starting and driving 5-21 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/24/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 294 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS WARNING Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park). Fail-
ure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and re-
sult in an accident. Make sure the shift selector has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal. 5-22 Starting and driving WSD0050 Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents. 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
tion. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated. HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: A Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: B Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO CURB: C Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the cen-
ter of the road if it moves. 4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 295 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 POWER STEERING SYSTEM BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate. When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle, but the steering will be much harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked by an NISSAN dea;er . The power steering system is designed to pro-
vide power assistance while driving to operate the steering wheel with light force. When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or driving at a very low speed, the power assist for the steering wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent over-
heating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged. While the power assist is reduced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. If the steering wheel operation is still per-
formed, the power steering may stop and the power steering warning light will illuminate. Stop the engine and push the ignition switch to the OFF position. The temperature of the power steering system will go down and the power assist level will return to normal after starting the engine. The power steering warning light will go off. Avoid repeating such steering wheel opera-
tions that could cause the power steering system to overheat. You may hear a noise from the front of the vehicle when the steering wheel is operated. This is not a malfunction. If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer. When the power steering warning light illumi-
nates with the engine running, the power assist for the steering will cease operation but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering efforts are required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds. The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at 2 wheels. BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-
tance will be longer. Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage. To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control. Starting and driving 5-23 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 296 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WARNING While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-
erating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident. If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder. Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly. Parking brake break-in Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best brake performance. 5-24 Starting and driving This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer. ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS) WARNING The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remem-
ber that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-
tances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-
sible for safety. Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness. When replacing tires, the specified size of tires on all four wheels. install When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tire and Loading Information label in the Technical and consumer informa-
tion section of this manual. For detailed information, see Wheels and tires in the Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself section of this manual. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-
vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-
pery surfaces. Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-
press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-
ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 297 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may stopping distances. increased result in Self-test feature The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-
tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer. Normal operation The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5
- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions. When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-
quired while driving. BRAKE ASSIST When the force applied to the brake pedal ex-
ceeds a certain level, the brake assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conven-
tional brake booster even with light pedal force. WARNING The brake assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. it is the driv-
ers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times. VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-
hicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC System helps to perform the following functions:
Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle. Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control function). Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following condi-
tions:
understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steer-
ing input) oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions) The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations. Starting and driving 5-25 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 298 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 When the VDC system operates, the indi-
cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the following:
indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC functions are off and the indicator will not flash. The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path. The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the off position then back to the on position. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly. Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions. See Slip indicator light and Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light in the Instru-
ments and controls section. If a malfunction occurs in the system, the and indicator lights come on in the instru-
ment panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator lights are on. The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC indicator illuminates to indi-
system. The cate the VDC system is off. When the VDC switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non slipping drive wheel. The 5-26 Starting and driving The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction. WARNING The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steer-
ing operation at high speeds or by care-
less or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully. Do not modify the vehicles suspension. If suspension parts such as shock ab-
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling per-
indicator may formance, and the and indi-
flash or both the cator lights may illuminate. If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and both the and the illuminate. lights may indicator If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, both the indicator lights may illuminate. and REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 299 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 When driving on extremely inclined sur-
faces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate prop-
indicator may flash or erly and the both the and indicator lights may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads. When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or indicator may flash or ramp, the indicator both the lights may illuminate. This is not a mal-
function. Restart the engine after driv-
ing onto a stable surface. and If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator may flash or both and indicator lights may the illuminate. The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road. COLD WEATHER DRIVING FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-
icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry function on the Intelligent Key. ANTI-FREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-
perature will drop below 32F (0C), check the anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection. For details, see Engine cooling system in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual. BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-
mum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For details, see Battery in the Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual. If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For details, see Changing engine coolant in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual. TIRE EQUIPMENT 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pave-
ment. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-
hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-
mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability informa-
tion. 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. Starting and driving 5-27 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 300 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 3. Tire chains may be used. For details see Tire chains in the Maintenance and do-it-
yourself section of this manual. SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter:
A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir. DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE WARNING Wet ice (32F, 0C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or grip under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet the road is salted or sanded. ice until 5-28 Starting and driving Whatever the condition, drive with cau-
tion. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. Allow greater following distances on slippery roads. Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-
ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid steering maneuvers. sudden any Do not use the cruise control on slip-
pery roads. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped) Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting. The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20F (27C) or lower. WARNING Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-
riously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection. Disconnect and properly store the en-
gine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury. Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-
tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt
(GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 301 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord. 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord. 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-
volt AC (VAC) outlet. 5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on. 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-
erly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts. Starting and driving 5-29 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 302 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 MEMO 5-30 Starting and driving REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 303 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 6 In case of emergency Emergency engine shut off . 6-2 Flat tire . 6-2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). 6-2 Changing a flat tire . 6-3 Jump starting . 6-7 Push starting. 6-9 If your vehicle overheats . 6-9 Towing your vehicle . 6-10 Towing recommended by NISSAN . 6-11 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . 6-12 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 304 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3 consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-
sure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires
(except the spare tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer to Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving section. WARNING Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac-
turer for the possible influences before use. If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci-
dent and could result in serious per-
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. 6-2 In case of emergency REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 305 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance person-
nel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle. WARNING Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the CVT is shifted into P
(Park). Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous. Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-
sional road assistance. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. CHANGING A FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-
low:
Stopping the vehicle 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Move the shift selector to P (Park). WCE0044 Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks 1 at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire 2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up. WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury. In case of emergency 6-3 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 306 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 LCE2046 WCE0067 SCE0630 Getting the spare tire and tools Open the trunk. Lift the luggage floor. Remove the jack 1 and wheel nut wrench 2 from the from the storage cover 3 . Then remove the storage cover 3 to access the spare tire. 6-4 In case of emergency Turn the clamp to remove the spare tire. Remove the spare tire. Removing wheel cover (if so equipped) CAUTION Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-
sult in personal injury. To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod 1 as illustrated. Apply cloth 2 between the wheel and jack rod to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover. Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or wheel surface. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 307 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. Never use blocks on or under the jack. Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for slip differentials. vehicles limited with Do not allow passengers to stay in the WCE0160 vehicle while it is on the jack. Jack-up point Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move. WARNING Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-
port it with safety stands. Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change. In case of emergency 6-5 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 308 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Always refer to the proper illustrations for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type. Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instruc-
tions. 1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground. 2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the jack head between the two 6-6 In case of emergency LCE0020 WCE0056 notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown. The jack should be used on firm and level ground. 3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-
move the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire. Installing the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under the heading Wheels and tires in the Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself section of this manual. 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-
tween the wheel and hub. 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 309 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated (A , B , C , D , E ). Lower the vehicle completely. WARNING Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-
hicle has been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque:
113 Nm (83 ft-lb) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all is recom-
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval. times. It Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. JUMP STARTING COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be fol-
lowed. COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire Load and Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar. 5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-
ment in the vehicle. 6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire. 7. Close the trunk. WARNING Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly se-
cured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. The spare tire is designed for emer-
gency use. See specific instructions un-
der the heading Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual. WARNING If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle. Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-
ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery. Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, imme-
diately flush the contacted area with water. Keep battery out of the reach of children. The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle. In case of emergency 6-7 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 310 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting. Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause se-
rious injury. Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it. 6-8 In case of emergency WARNING Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury. 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their bat-
teries near each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. WCE0054 2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-
lector to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air condi-
tioner, etc.). 3. Remove the vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard. 4. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence illustrated (A , B , C , D ). REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 311 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS CAUTION CAUTION Do not push start this vehicle. The three-way catalyst may be damaged. Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models cannot be push-started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage. Always connect positive () to positive
() and negative () to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) not to the battery. Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine com-
partment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal. 5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. 6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-
hicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the en-
gine of the vehicle being jump started. CAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again. 7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable. 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid. If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the following steps. WARNING Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire. To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. Do not open the hood if steam is com-
ing out. 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift selector to P (Park). Do not stop the engine. 2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed. In case of emergency 6-9 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 312 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-
ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen. 6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-
ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer. 4. Open the engine hood. WARNING If steam or water is coming from the en-
gine, stand clear to prevent getting burned. 5. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-
gine. WARNING Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time. 6-10 In case of emergency TOWING YOUR VEHICLE When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-
age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-
able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-
tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:
WARNING Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck. CAUTION When towing, make sure that the trans-
mission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used. Always attach safety chains before towing. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 313 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to Flat towing in the Technical and consumer information sec-
tion of this manual. ACE0511 SCE0199A TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated. In case of emergency 6-11 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 314 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CAUTION Never tow Continuously Variable Trans-
mission (CVT) models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is nec-
essary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels. When towing Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models with the front wheels on towing dollies:
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Move the shift selector to the N (Neu-
tral) position. When towing Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies): Always release the parking brake. 6-12 In case of emergency VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle) Pulling a stuck vehicle WARNING To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-
sonal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle:
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-
cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturers instructions for the recovery de-
vice. Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing or vehicle recovery. Rocking a stuck vehicle Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions recovery procedure. regarding the Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle. Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturers instructions. Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle. Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point. WARNING Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged. If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. 2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions. 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 315 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive). Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion. Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive). Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55 km/h). 5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle. In case of emergency 6-13 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 316 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 MEMO 6-14 In case of emergency REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 317 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 7 Appearance and care Cleaning exterior . 7-2 Washing . 7-2 Waxing . 7-2 Removing spots . 7-3 Underbody . 7-3 Glass . 7-3 Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . 7-3 Chrome parts . 7-4 Tire dressings . 7-4 Cleaning interior. 7-4 Air fresheners . 7-5 Floor mats . 7-5 Seat belts . 7-6 Corrosion protection . 7-6 Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion . 7-6 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion . 7-6 To protect your vehicle from corrosion . 7-6 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 318 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it. To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your vehicle as soon as you can:
after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain. after driving on coastal roads. when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface. when dust or mud builds up on the surface. Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover. WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm
(never hot) water. 7-2 Appearance and care CAUTION Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, espe-
cially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used. Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical deter-
gents, gasoline or solvents. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted. Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must removing caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged. taken when be Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water. Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots. WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax. A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-
ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 319 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store. UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, retreated. Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film. CAUTION When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electri-
cal conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements. GLASS WAI0005 ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so equipped) When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean if the high-mounted stop light (if so equipped) is removed first. Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires. To remove the high-mounted stop light:
1 Push toward rear of vehicle. 2 Lift to remove. The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle. Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-
ened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels. Appearance and care 7-3 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 320 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CAUTION Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels:
Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels. Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as am-
bient temperature. Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied. CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish. TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-
ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint. 7-4 Appearance and care If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions:
Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
ing on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil-based tire dressing. Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help tire prevent tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove). from entering the it Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-
pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves. CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-
ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth. Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather. Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-
facturers recommendations. Some fabric pro-
tectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material. Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by the tire dressing manufacturer. Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens. CAUTION Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-
lar material. Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leathers natural finish. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 321 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Never use fabric protectors unless rec-
ommended by the manufacturer. Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-
age the lens cover. AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precautions:
Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-
manent discoloration when they contact ve-
hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-
ener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface. Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause imme-
diate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces. Carefully read and follow the manufacturers in-
structions before using the air fresheners. FLOOR MATS WARNING To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision or injury:
NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-
front in the driver floor mat other position. Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats specifically designed for use in your ve-
hicle model. See your NISSAN dealer for more information. Properly position the mats in the floor-
well using the floor mat positioning aid. See Floor mat positioning aid in this section. The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-
tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-
tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn. LAI0009 Floor mat positioning aid This vehicle includes two drivers side front floor mat brackets and one passengers side front floor mat bracket to help keep your floor mats in place. Genuine NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The drivers side floor mat has two grommet holes incorporated in it and the passengers side has one grommet hole. Position each mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet holes while centering the mat in the floorwell. Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned. Appearance and care 7-5 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 322 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. See Seat belt maintenance in the Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
tal restraint system section of this manual. WARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing. 7-6 Appearance and care CORROSION PROTECTION MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-
sion to those parts which are not well ventilated. Air pollution Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-
ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-
erates the disintegration of paint surfaces. TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible. The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. Damage to paint and other protective coat-
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-
hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion. Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 323 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CAUTION A license plate frame could vibrate and cause noise or paint damage. To avoid damage or noise, add a soft adhesive pad with a maximum thickness of 1/8 in (4 mm) to the back lower edge of the license plate frame. CAUTION NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corro-
sion, which may be required in some areas, con-
sult a NISSAN dealer. License plate bracket padding LAI2001 1. License plate 2. Trunk 3. License plate frame 4. Padding Appearance and care 7-7 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 324 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Maintenance requirements. 8-2 General maintenance . 8-2 Explanation of general maintenance items . 8-2 Maintenance precautions . 8-5 Engine compartment check locations . 8-6 Engine cooling system . 8-8 Checking engine coolant level . 8-9 Changing engine coolant . 8-9 Engine oil. 8-10 Checking engine oil level . 8-10 Changing engine oil . 8-11 Changing engine oil filter . 8-12 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . 8-13 Power steering fluid. 8-14 Brake fluid . 8-14 Brake fluid . 8-15 Windshield-washer fluid. 8-15 Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . 8-15 Battery . 8-16 Jump starting . 8-18 Variable voltage control system. 8-18 Drive belt . 8-19 Spark plugs. 8-20 Replacing spark plugs . 8-20 Air cleaner . 8-20 In-cabin microfilter . 8-21 Windshield wiper blades . 8-21 Cleaning . 8-21 Replacing . 8-22 Brakes . 8-23 Self-adjusting brakes . 8-23 Brake pad wear indicators . 8-23 Fuses . 8-23 Engine compartment . 8-24 Passenger compartment . 8-25 Battery replacement . 8-27 NISSAN Intelligent Key . 8-27 Lights . 8-28 Headlights . 8-28 Front park light . 8-29 Fog lights (if so equipped) . 8-29 Turn signal lights . 8-30 Exterior and interior lights. 8-32 Wheels and tires . 8-35 Tire pressure. 8-35 Tire labeling. 8-39 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 325 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Types of tires. 8-42 Tire chains. 8-43 Changing wheels and tires . 8-44 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 326 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-
mum maintenance requirements with long ser-
vice intervals to save you both time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-
nance is essential to maintain your NISSANs good mechanical condition, as well as its emis-
sions and engine performance. It is the owners responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-
nance chain. Scheduled maintenance For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide. You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals. General maintenance General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day op-
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed. 8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools. These checks or inspections can be done by you, a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer. Where to go for service During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer. When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the Maintenance precau-
tions later in this section. NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists who are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-
hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it. You can be confident that a NISSAN dealers service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economical way. EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with * is found later in this section. Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 327 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim. Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information
(US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-
aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) transmitter components Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age. Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when per-
forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-
hicle, etc. Additional information on the following items with an * is found later in this sec-
tion. Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-
tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-
ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly steep hill, check that the vehicle is held securely with the shift selector in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes. Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-
tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, see a NISSAN dealer. Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and the lock knobs (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt web-
bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 328 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-
ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises. Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Windshield wiper and washer* Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel). in each cell. Battery* Check the fluid level It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-
hicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. 8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: 1. In-
stallation or extended use of electronic ac-
cessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.) 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short dis-
tances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health. Brake fluid levels* Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir. Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Engine oil level* Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See Ex-
haust gas (carbon monoxide) in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately. Power steering fluid level* and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radia-
tor and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections. Underbody The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, oth-
erwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See the Appearance and care sec-
tion of this manual. Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 329 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precau-
tions which should be closely observed. WARNING Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-
ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift selector to P (Park). Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs. If you must work with the engine run-
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle. Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan. If you must run the engine in an en-
closed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is neces-
sary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery. On gasoline engine models, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off. CAUTION Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Al-
ways conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid. Never leave the engine or the CVT re-
lated component harness connector disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position. Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position. This Maintenance and do-it-yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-
able. See Owners Manual/Service Manual or-
der information in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual. You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by a NISSAN dealer. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 330 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS Power steering fluid reservoir Engine coolant reservoir Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir Air cleaner Fuse block/ Fusible links Battery Engine oil dipstick Radiator cap QR25DE engine 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Drive belt location 11. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir 8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself LDI2111 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 331 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Power steering fluid reservoir Engine coolant reservoir Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir Air cleaner Fuse block/ Fusible links Battery Engine oil dipstick Radiator cap VQ35DE engine 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Drive belt location 11. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir LDI2112 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 332 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of cool-
ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-
ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-
ant. Refer to the Nissan Service and Maintenance Guide for more details. ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cool-
ing system additives are not necessary. WARNING Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. See precautions in If your vehicle overheats found in the In case of emergency section of this manual. The radiator is equipped with a pres-
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-
gine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap. 8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself CAUTION Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission, and/or cooling system.
(blue) When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34 F (-37 C). If additional freeze protec-
tion is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
(blue) concentrate following the direc-
tions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturers instructions to maintain minimum anti-
freeze protection to -34 F (-37 C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 333 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for more details. If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer. CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant. The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual. Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat-
ing. WARNING To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the en-
gine is hot. Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
dren and pets. Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. LDI2119 CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the MIN level B , add coolant to the MAX level A . If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level A . Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 334 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 ENGINE OIL LDI2120 LDI2121 WDI0214 QR25DE engine VQ35DE engine CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-
insert it all the way. 8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H (High) and L (Low) marks B . This is the normal oper-
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below the L (Low) mark A , remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill C . 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 335 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insuffi-
cient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not cov-
ered by warranty. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the se-
verity of operating conditions. LDI2123 LDI2145 QR25DE engine CHANGING ENGINE OIL 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature, then turn it off. 3. Remove the oil filler cap A by turning it counterclockwise. 4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug B . VQ35DE engine 5. Remove the drain plugB with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil. If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See Changing engine oil filter in this section. Waste oil must be disposed of prop-
erly. Check your local regulations. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 336 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. 8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-
quired. 9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. WARNING Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep used engine oil out of reach of children. CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot. 6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force. Drain plug tightening torque:
29 - 39 Nm (22 - 29 ft-lb) 7. Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler cap securely. and Capacities See recommended fuel/lubricants in the Technical and con-
sumer information section of this manual for drain and refill capacity. QR25DE LDI2122 CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter A . 4. Loosen the oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand. filter A with an oil 8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 337 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 LDI2143 VQ35DE CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot. 5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag. CAUTION Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to engine damage. 6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil. 7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn. 8. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required. 9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary. CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID CAUTION Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Do not mix with other fluids. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the warranty. When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 338 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID CAUTION Do not overfill. Use of a power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF will prevent the power steering system from operating properly. Power steering fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children. LDI2126 Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The fluid level should be checked when the fluid is cold at fluid temperatures of 0 to 30C (32 to 86F). The fluid level can be checked with the level gauge which is attached to the cap. To check the fluid level, remove the cap. The fluid level should be between the MAX 1 and MIN 2 lines. If the fluid is below the MIN 2 line, add Genuine NISSAN E-PSF. Remove the cap and fill through the opening. 8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself to For further brake fluid specification information, refer recommended fuel/lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual. Capacities and WARNING Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehi-
cles stopping ability. Clean the filler cap before removing. Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children. CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 339 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID LDI2125 LDI2116 BRAKE FLUID Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer. WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-
cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on. To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-
washer fluid into the reservoir opening. Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturers in-
structions for the mixture ratio. Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield-washer fluid. Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-
shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-
freeze or equivalent. WARNING Anti-freeze is is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children. CAUTION Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant fluid. This may result in damage to the paint. for windshield-washer Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concen-
trates at full strength. Some methyl al-
cohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 340 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 BATTERY Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recom-
mended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reser-
voir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water. Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water. Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge. NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.) 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health. WARNING Do not expose the battery to flames, an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-
gen gas generated by the battery is ex-
plosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touch-
ing a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. 8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 341 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce bat-
tery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion. When working on or near a battery, al-
ways wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry. Battery posts, terminals and related ac-
cessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling. Keep battery out of the reach of children. Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent caps tight and the battery level. 1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery case. WDI0224 LDI0302 2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall the vent caps. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 342 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary, see Jump starting in the In case of emergency section of this manual. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact a NISSAN dealer. Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system. This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator. The current sensor is located near the battery along the negative battery cable. If you add elec-
trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area. LDI2132 CAUTION Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will by-
pass the variable voltage control sys-
tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. Use electrical accessories with the en-
gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. 8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 343 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 DRIVE BELT 1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer. 2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-
tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide. schedule found in QR25DE engine LDI2130 Drive belt Automatic tensioner 1. Crankshaft pulley 2. 3. Water pump pulley 4. 5. Alternator Air conditioner WARNING Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate unexpectedly. LDI2131 VQ35DE engine 1. Crankshaft pulley 2. 3. 4. Drive belt automatic tensioner Alternator Air conditioner Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 344 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER WARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely. CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs. If replacement is required, see your NISSAN dealer for assistance. SDI1895 REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Iridium-tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped A spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-
low the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide. Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-
ping. QR25DE: Always replace spark plugs with recommended ones. VQ35DE: Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones 8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself QR25DE LDI2117 NOTE:
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused. Replace the air cleaner filter according to the maintenance log shown in the Warranty Informa-
tion and Maintenance Booklet. To remove the air cleaner filter:
Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner cover upward. Remove the air cleaner filter. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 345 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 VQ35DE LDI2118 Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous-
ing and the cover with a damp cloth. WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES NOTE:
CLEANING After installing a new air cleaner, make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing and latch the clips. WARNING Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the flame if the engine backfires. If it isnt there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury. IN-CABIN MICROFILTER The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-
borne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for change intervals. If replacement is required, see your NISSAN dealer. If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, install new windshield wiper blades. CAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-
age the windshield and impair driver vision. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 346 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CAUTION After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened. Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-
aged from wind pressure. WDI0594 REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield. 2 Push the release tab, then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove. 3 Remove the wiper blade. 4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place. 5. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove. 6. Return the wiper to its original position and release it until it has made contact with the windshield. 8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself WDI0570 If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the windshield washer nozzle A . This may cause clogging or improper wind-
shield washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin B . REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 347 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 BRAKES FUSES If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer. SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied. WARNING See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-
placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-
ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-
sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For more information regarding brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-
nance schedule information in the NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide. LDI0455 Two types of fuses are used. Type A is used in the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type B is used in the passenger compartment fuse box. Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box. Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-
partment and passenger compartment fuse boxes. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 348 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment. LDI0457 LDI2133 If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse, the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely. Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-
hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the underhood fuse boxes. ENGINE COMPARTMENT CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire. If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF. 2. Open the engine hood. 8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 349 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 5. 6. WDI0452 If the fuse is open A , replace it with a new fuse B . If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer. Fusible links If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts. LDI2134 If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF. 2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 350 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WDI0452 LDI0456 LDI2035 Type A Type B 4. If the fuse is open A , replace it with an equivalent good fuse B . 5. Push the fuse box cover to install. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer. Extended storage switch If any electrical equipment does not operate, remove the extended storage switch and check for an open fuse. NOTE:
The extended storage switch is used for long term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-
tended storage switch is broken it is not necessary to replace it. Replace only the open fuse in the switch with a new fuse. 8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 351 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 How to replace the extended storage switch:
1. To remove the extended storage switch, be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position. 2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF position. 3. Remove the fuse box cover. 4. Pinch the locking tabs 1 found on each side of the storage switch. 5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the fuse box 2 . BATTERY REPLACEMENT CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts. NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-
lows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-
2. gent Key. Insert a small screwdriver A into the slit B of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect the casing. 3. Replace the battery with a new one. Recommended battery: CR2032 or equiva-
lent. Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-
tric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction. Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity. Make sure that the + side faces the bot-
tom of the case. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27 LDI2001 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 352 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. For Canada:
This device complies with RSS-210 of In-
dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, in-
cluding interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device. LIGHTS HEADLIGHTS Replacing the xenon headlight bulb (if so equipped) WARNING cHIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on, they pro-
duce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disas-
semble. Always have your xenon head-
lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see Headlight and turn signal switch in the Instru-
ments and controls section. Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
(if so equipped) If bulb replacement is required, see your NISSAN dealer. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore WDI0568 4. Close the lid securely as illustrated C D . 5. Operate the buttons to check the operation. See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement. FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes 8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 353 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CAUTION FRONT PARK LIGHT If replacement is required, see your NISSAN dealer. FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped) Replacing the fog light bulb Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer. Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed. Only touch the base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance. High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 354 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the fastenersA ; carefully pull back the front fender protector . 3. Rotate the bulb B counterclockwise and pull out to remove. TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS Replacing the turn signal bulb 8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself LDI2144 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 355 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the fastenersA ; carefully pull back the front fender protector. 3. Rotate the bulbB counterclockwise and pull out to remove. LDI2137 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 356 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*1 Headlight assembly *2 Low (Halogen) Low (Xenon) High Park Door mirror turn signal light *2 Turn signal light Front fog light (if so equipped) Day time running lights (Canada only) Step light Rear combination light *2 Tail/Stop Turn Backup (reversing) License plate light *2 High-mounted stop light *2 Inside Spoiler (if so equipped) Front map light *2 Rear personal light Trunk light Vanity mirror light Glove box light *2 Console light *2 55 35 65 5 8 55 19 3.8 H11 D25 H9 W5W LED 7444A H11 PS19W 194 C HTEI
(LED)/ 27/8 LED/ 3156AK 27 18 5 8 3.4 3156AK 921 W5W LED LED LED U88 158 HTU14v
*1 Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
*2 See a NISSAN dealer for assistance. 8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 357 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Front map light 1. 2. Headlamp assembly 3. 4. Turn signal light Fog light (if so equipped)/ Day time running light (if so equipped) Step light Door mirror turn signal light Personal light 5. 6. 7. 8. High-mount stoplight (if so equipped) 9. 10. Spoiler-mount stop light 11. Rear combination light 12. License plate light Trunk light LDI2100 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 358 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Indicates bulb removal Indicates bulb installation Use a cloth 1 to protect the housing. Step light LDI0341 WDI0306 Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, light and/or cover. first remove the lens, 8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 359 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WDI0670 LDI2135 Personal light Use a cloth 1 to protect the housing. Rear combination light Bulb replacement requires the removal of the rear combination light assembly. If replacement is re-
quired, see your NISSAN dealer. Trunk light WHEELS AND TIRES If you have a flat tire, see Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual. TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-
tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving). For more details, refer to Low tire pres-
sure warning light in the Instruments and controls section, Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving section, and Flat tire in the In case of emergency section. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 360 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long dis-
tance trips. The recommended tire pres-
sure specifications are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the Cold Tire Pressure heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:
Most tires naturally lose air over time. Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking. The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. 8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself The TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert pro-
vides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle for inflating tires to the recom-
mended COLD tire pressure. For more information, see TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert in the Starting and driving section. Incorrect tire pressure, including un-
der inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. WARNING Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident. is located on The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating the
(GVWR) F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
tion label. The vehicle weight ca-
pacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your ve-
hicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling character-
istics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading be-
yond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other ve-
hicle components. Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level. For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Information
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet. Safety REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 361 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 4 Tire size refer to Tire labeling later in this section. 5 Spare tire size. 6 Vehicle load limit: See Vehicle load-
ing information in the Technical and consumer information section. Tire and loading information label 1 Seating capacity: The maximum num-
ber of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle. 2 Original tire size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory. LDI2083 3 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recom-
mended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best bal-
ance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicles GVWR. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 362 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 3. Remove the gauge. 4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specifica-
tion shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. 5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed. Checking tire pressure LDI0393 6. Install the valve stem cap. 7. Check the pressure of all other tires, 1. Remove the valve stem cap from the including the spare. tire. 2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem side-
ways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage. 8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 363 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Front Original Tire Rear Original Tire Spare Tire Size P215/60R16 P215/55R17 P235/45R18 P215/60R16 P215/55R17 P235/45R18 T135/70D16 Cold Tire Inflation Pres-
sure 220 kPa, 32 PSI 230 kPa, 33 PSI 220 kPa, 32 PSI 230 kPa, 33 PSI 420 kPa, 60 PSI WDI0394 Example TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information iden-
tifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also pro-
vides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 364 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating. 1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H) 4. R: The R stands for radial. Example WDI0395 1. P: The P indicates the tire is de-
signed for passenger vehicles (not all tires have this information). 2. Three-digit number (215): This num-
ber gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to side-
wall edge. 3. Two-digit number (65): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tires ratio of height to width. 8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches. 6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tires load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires be-
cause it is not required by law. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 365 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Example WDI0396 2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX) 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional). 5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the Depart-
ment Of Transportation. The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number. 2. Two-digit code: Manufacturers identification mark. 3. Two-digit code: Tire size. ture. 6. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For ex-
ample, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing, then look on the other sidewall of the tire. 3 Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubber-
coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-
ers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. 4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-
sure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible in-
flation pressure. 5 Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be car-
ried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory in-
stalled tire. 6 Term of tubeless or tube type Indicates whether the tire requires an in-
ner tube (tube type) or not (tubeless). Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 366 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 7 The word radial TYPES OF TIRES Summer tires The word radial is shown if the tire has radial structure. 8 Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown. Other Tire-related Terminology In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-
ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. 8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself WARNING When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety In-
formation (US) or Tire Safety Informa-
tion (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet. All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-
els to provide good performance all year, includ-
ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas. NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially re-
duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. Snow tires If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. If you do not, Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-
ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 367 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. TIRE CHAINS CAUTION Only certain SAE class S tire chains can be used on this vehicle. Using the wrong Class S chains on this vehicle will cause damage to the vehicle. If you plan to use tire chains/cables, you should use a tire chain that meets the minimum clearances for your vehicle. LDI0574 Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use a tire chain that is designed to provide the specified space A between the installed tire chain 1 and where the tire meets the rim 2 as shown on the chart. NOTE:
Tire chains are not permitted for use with 18 in wheels. Wheel size Minimum space required 16 in 17 in
.7 in (17 mm)
.2 in (4 mm) A tire chain that provides the specified amount of space will provide the necessary clearance be-
tween the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component. The minimum clearances are determined using the factory-equipped tires. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action dam-
age to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be ad-
versely affected. Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels. Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 368 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with tire chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress. CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES WDI0258 Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). See Flat tire in the In case of emer-
gency section of this manual for tire re-
placing procedures. As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. 8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 Nm) The wheel nuts must be kept tight-
ened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval. WARNING After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km)
(also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation. For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Information
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet. Safety REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 369 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WDI0259 1. Wear indicator 2. Location mark Tire wear and damage WARNING Tires should be periodically in-
spected for wear, cracking, bulg-
ing or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced. The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced. Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified because some tire damage may not be ob-
vious. Replace the tires as neces-
sary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury. technician Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal in-
jury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, contact a NISSAN dealer. For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Information
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet. Safety Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual. WARNING The use of tires other than those recom-
mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, VDC system, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to acci-
dents and could result in serious per-
sonal injury. If your vehicle was originally equipped with 4 tires that were the same size and you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires , install the new tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an acci-
dent and personal injury. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-45 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 370 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been re-
paired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail with-
out warning. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Infor-
mation (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet. The use of retread tires is not Care of wheels recommended. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety In-
formation (US) or Tire Safety Informa-
tion (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet. Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-
anced as required. Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage. Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance. Clean the inner side of the wheels when the is changed or the underside of the wheel vehicle is washed. Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter. If the wheels are changed for any rea-
son, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-
hicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs/drums. Such inter-
ference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Refer to Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual for wheel off-set dimensions. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. 8-46 Maintenance and do-it-yourself REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 371 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire) Observe the following precautions if the TEM-
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident:
WARNING The spare tire should be used for emer-
gency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first oppor-
tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-
tial damage. Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). CAUTION Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause dam-
age to the vehicle. Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught. When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the front (original) tires. Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles. Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time. Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-47 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 372 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 MEMO 8-48 Maintenance and do-it-yourself REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 373 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 9 Technical and consumer information Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . 9-2 Fuel recommendation . 9-3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . 9-6 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . 9-7 Specifications. 9-8 Engine . 9-8 Wheels and tires . 9-9 Dimensions and weights . 9-9 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country . 9-10 Vehicle identification . 9-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . 9-10 Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) . 9-10 Engine serial number. 9-11 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . 9-11 Emission control information label . 9-12 Tire and loading information label. 9-12 Air conditioner specification label. 9-12 Installing front license plate . 9-13 Vehicle loading information . 9-13 Terms . 9-13 Vehicle load capacity . 9-14 Loading tips . 9-16 Measurement of weights . 9-16 Towing a trailer . 9-17 Flat towing. 9-17 Uniform tire quality grading . 9-17 Emission control system warranty . 9-18 Reporting safety defects . 9-19 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . 9-20 Event Data Recorders (EDR). 9-20 Owners Manual/Service Manual order information . 9-21 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 374 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity. Fuel Engine oil *6 Drain and Refill With oil filter change Without oil filter change Cooling system With reservoir QR25DE VQ35DE QR25DE VQ35DE QR25DE VQ35DE Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid Power steering fluid (PSF) Brake fluid Multi-purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system oil Windshield-washer fluid Capacity (Approximate) US measure 18 gal Imp measure 15 gal Liter 68.0 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants See Fuel recommendation later in this section. 4-7/8 qt 5-1/8 qt 4-1/2 qt 4-3/4 qt 4 qt 4-1/4 qt 3-3/4 qt 4 qt 2 gal 2-5/8 gal 1-3/4 gal 2-1/8 gal 4.6 4.8 4.3 4.5 8.1 9.8 Refill to the proper level according to the instruc-
tions in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section.*8 1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 For QR25DE engine models:
Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1 Viscosity SAE 0W-20 *1 For VQ35DE engine models:
Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1, *7 Viscosity SAE 5W-30 *1, *7 Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 *2 Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent.*3 Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *4 or equivalent DOT 3 NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base) HFC-134a (R-134a) *5 Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-
freeze fluid or equivalent
*1: For further details, see Engine oil and oil filter recommendations in this section.
*2: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
*3: Use of a power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF will prevent the power steering system from operating properly.
*4: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.
*5: For further details, see Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations in this section.
*6: For further details, see Engine oil in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual.
*7: NISSAN recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester Oil available at a NISSAN dealer.
*8: See your NISSAN dealer for service. 9-2 Technical and consumer information REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 375 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 FUEL RECOMMENDATION Gasoline specifications Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91). CAUTION Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst. Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your ve-
hicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control devices and sys-
tems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-
fied by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbrevia-
tion or the appropriate percentage for that region. NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-
cations where it is available. Many of the automo-
bile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications. Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-
lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when available. Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-
genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-
patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-
termined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline. If an oxygenate-blend other than metha-
nol blend is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.) E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-
genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect the emission control devices and sys-
tems of the vehicle and should not be used. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new ve-
hicle limited warranty. If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corro-
sion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suit-
able for use in NISSAN vehicles. Technical and consumer information 9-3 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 376 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 If any driveability problems such as engine stall-
ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. oxygenate-blend fuels, Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-
eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage. E-15 fuel E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. gov-
ernment regulations require fuel ethanol dispens-
ing pumps to be identified with small, square, orange and black label with the common abbre-
viation or the appropriate percentage for that region. E85 fuel E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region. 9-4 Technical and consumer information Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-
tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine. damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-
countered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load. Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-
vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible. ignition timing may result Incorrect in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 377 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 QR25DE engine models LTI2037 Technical and consumer information 9-5 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 378 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-
ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage. Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-
placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in Change intervals. Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
ranty. VQ35DE engine models LTI2024 ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants earlier in this section. NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy. Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-
9-6 Technical and consumer information tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-
cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-
tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-
sary when the proper oil type is used and main-
tenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 379 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 CAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air condition-
ing system and will require the replace-
ment of all air conditioner system components. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earths ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earths atmosphere, certain government regula-
tions require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-
tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-
ant. Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system. Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes:
repeated short distance driving at cold out-
side temperatures driving in dusty conditions extensive idling towing a trailer stop and go commuting Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for the maintenance schedule. AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refriger-
ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C system oil Type S or the exact equivalents. Technical and consumer information 9-7 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 380 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order Idle speed CVT (in N position) Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO % at idle Spark plug Spark plug gap (Nominal) Camshaft operation This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002. Timing chain 9-8 Technical and consumer information QR25DE Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC 4-cylinder in-line in (mm) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0) cu in (cm3) 151.82 (2,488) 1342 VQ35DE Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4) 213.45 (3,498) 123456 FXE20HE-11C in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) No adjustment is necessary. FXE22HR-11 0.043 (1.1) Timing chain REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 381 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Wheel type Steel Aluminum Aluminum T-type (ST spare) T-type (AL spare) Tire size Size 16 x 7.0J 17 x 7.5J 18 x 7.5J 16 x 4T 16 x 4T Offset mm (in) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 55 (2.17) 40 (1.57) 30 (1.18) 2.5 models P215/60R16 2.5 models and 3.5 P215/55R17 models 3.5 models P235/45R18 Spare tire T135/70D16 Overall length Overall width Overall height 2.5 models 3.5 models Front track 16 and 17 inch tire 18 inch tire Rear track 16 and 17 inch tire 18 inch tire Wheelbase Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) lb (kg) lb (kg) 191.5 (4,863) 72.0 (1,830) 57.9 (1,471) 58.1 (1,477) 62.4 (1,585) 62.0 (1,575) 62.4 (1,585) 62.0 (1,575) 109.3 (2,775) See the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label on the center pillar between the drivers side front and rear doors. Technical and consumer information 9-9 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 382 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION LTI0025 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE WTI0037 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number) The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identifica-
tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration. The vehicle identification number is located as shown. WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-
hicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-
cles engine. Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-
fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-
sion control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; there-
fore, vehicle specifications may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into an-
other country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transpor-
tation, and registration are the responsibil-
ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result. 9-10 Technical and consumer information REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 383 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WTI0096 LTI2034 WTI0172 QR25DE VQ35DE ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL The number is stamped on the engine as shown. The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-
bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-
able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully. Technical and consumer information 9-11 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 384 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL LTI2004 LTI0224 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL WTI0178 AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL The emission control tached to the underside of the hood as shown. information label is at-
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The label is located as shown. The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as shown. 9-12 Technical and consumer information REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 385 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION LTI2013 To mount the front license plate, attach the li-
cense plate bracket 1 to the plastic finisher at the location marks (small dimples) using the two 6 mm screws provided. WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:
Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment, flu-
ids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not in-
clude passengers and cargo. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing)
- maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-
sengers, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is lo-
cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. luggage, hitch, GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This informa-
tion the located F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. on is GCWR (Gross Combined Weight rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer. Technical and consumer information 9-13 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 386 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 To get the combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the follow-
ing illustration. limit specified of Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight the load
(passengers and cargo) for the ve-
hicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be in-
cluded as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label. Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit. VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-
hicle shown as The combined weight of occupants and cargo on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as Seating Capacity on the Tire and Load-
ing Information label. 9-14 Technical and consumer information REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 387 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Steps for determining correct load limit 1. Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicles placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. 4. The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.) Example LTI0152 Technical and consumer information 9-15 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 388 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WARNING Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seat-
backs. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could oc-
cur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause per-
sonal injury. 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. See Measurement of weights later in this section. Also check tires for proper inflation pres-
sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label. LOADING TIPS The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR. 9-16 Technical and consumer information Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer brak-
ing distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered vehicles warranty. the by MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-
ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-
ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-
move items to bring all weights below the ratings. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 389 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 TOWING A TRAILER UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle. Continuously Variable Transmission FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home. To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicles drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufac-
turers recommendations when using their prod-
uct. CAUTION Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage. Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-
ways tow forward, never backward. DO NOT tow any continuously variable transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Do-
ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-
sion parts due to lack of transmission lubrication. For emergency towing procedures refer to Towing recommended by NISSAN in the In case of emergency section of this manual. DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, A, B and C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-
sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Technical and consumer information 9-17 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 390 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 WARNING WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-
ther separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature A, B and C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. 9-18 Technical and consumer information EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties:
For USA 1. Emission Defects Warranty 2. Emissions Performance Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-
ment by writing to:
Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-
ment by writing to:
Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 391 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans-
port Canadas Road Safety Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-
ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere
(French speakers). To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS For USA If you believe that your vehicle has a de-
fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immedi-
ately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-
come involved in individual problems be-
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-
hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle from http://www.safercar.gov. safety You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. For Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a de-
fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immedi-
ately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN. If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN con-
duct a recall campaign. However, Trans-
port Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. You may contact Transport Canadas De-
fect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safety defects online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-
Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx. Technical and consumer information 9-19 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 392 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-
quired to be in what is called the ready condi-
tion for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicles inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is not ready. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is ready. Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the ready condition or to prepare the vehicle for testing. This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-
ing how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, How fast the vehicle was traveling. Sounds are not recorded. These data can help provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-
facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have ac-
cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-
mitted by law. 9-20 Technical and consumer information REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 393 SESS: 9 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 OWNERS MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factory-
trained technicians working at NISSAN dealer-
ships. Genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals can also be purchased. For USA For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
1-800-450-9491 www.nissan-techinfo.com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-
vice Manual or Owners Manual, for this model year and prior, please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and loca-
tion of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you. Technical and consumer information 9-21 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 394 SESS: 9 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 MEMO 9-22 Technical and consumer information REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 395 SESS: 9 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 10 Index A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System). Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . Air bag system
. 5-24
.1-37 Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . Air bag warning light. Air cleaner housing filter . Air conditioner
. 1-45
. 1-52, 2-13
. 8-20
. Air conditioner operation . Air conditioner service . Air conditioner specification label . Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . Heater and air conditioner controls . Servicing air conditioner . 4-22
.4-30
.9-12
. 9-7
.4-19, 4-28
. 4-30
.4-23
. Air flow charts. Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) . Anchor point locations . Antenna . Anti-lock brake warning light. Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). Armrests . Audible reminders . Audio system . Bluetooth audio. Compact disc (CD) player . 2-26
. 1-23
. 4-69
. 2-10
. 5-24
. 1-7
. 2-16
. 4-30
.4-62, 4-64
. 4-40, 4-46, 4-52
. FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player . FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player . 4-39
.4-43, 4-48 Audio System iPod Player . Audio system
. Radio . USB interface . Autolight switch. Automatic
. 4-57, 4-59
. 4-30
.4-54, 4-56
.2-32
. Automatic power window switch . Transmission shift selector lock release . Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . Automatic door locks . AUX jack. 2-44
.5-17
.3-34
. 3-5
. 4-41, 4-47, 4-54
. B
. Battery . Charge warning light . Before starting the engine . Belt (See drive belt)
. Block heater Engine . Bluetooth audio. Bluetooth hands-free phone
. system . Booster seats . Brake
. 8-16
.2-11
.5-11
.8-19
. 5-28
.4-62, 4-64
. 4-70, 4-85, 4-96
. 1-33
. Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). Brake fluid . 5-24
.8-14
. Brake light (See stop light). Brake system . Brake warning light . Brake wear indicators . Parking brake operation . Self-adjusting brakes . Brakes . Break-in schedule . Brightness/contrast button. Brightness control
. Instrument panel
. Bulb check/instrument panel. Bulb replacement . C
. 8-32
. 5-23
. 2-11
. 2-16, 8-23
.5-19
. 8-23
. 8-23
. 5-20
. 4-11
. 2-34
.2-10
.8-32
. Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . Car phone or CB radio . CD care and cleaning . CD player (See audio system) . Check tire pressure. Child restraints. 9-2
.9-13
.4-69
. 4-67
.4-40, 4-46, 4-52
. 2-25
. 1-17, 1-18, 1-19, 1-21
. Precautions on child restraints . Top tether strap anchor point locations .
(models without navigation system) . 1-19, 1-25, 1-30, 1-33
.1-23
. 3-6
.2-16
. 7-2
.4-39
.4-39
. Child safety rear door lock. Chimes, audible reminders. Cleaning exterior and interior . Clock . REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 396 SESS: 9 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
. Clock set . C.M.V.S.S. certification label
. Cold weather driving . Compact disc (CD) player
. Compass display . Console box . Console light . Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). 4-39
. 9-11
. 5-27
.4-40, 4-46, 4-52
. 2-6
. 2-41
.2-47
. 5-13
. Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . Driving with Continuously Variable
. Transmission (CVT) . Transmission shift selector lock release . Brightness/contrast button . Enter button . Setting button . Control panel buttons . 8-13
.5-13
.5-17
. 4-4
.4-11
.4-4
. 4-7 Controls Heater and air conditioner controls . 4-19, 4-28 Coolant
. Capacities and recommended
.9-2
. fuel/lubricants . 8-9
. Changing engine coolant . 8-9
. Checking engine coolant level . 2-5
. Engine coolant temperature gauge . 7-6
. 5-19
.2-40, 2-41 Corrosion protection . Cruise control
. Cup holders . D Daytime running light system (Canada only) . 2-33 10-2 Defroster switch
. Rear window and outside mirror defroster
. switch. Dimensions and weights . Dimmer switch for instrument panel
. Display controls (see control panel buttons)
. Door locks . Drive belt . Driving
. 2-29
. 9-9
.2-34
. 4-4
. 3-4
.8-19 Engine serial number
. Engine specifications . Starting the engine . Enter button . Event data recorders . Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . Extended storage switch . Eyeglass case . 9-11
. 9-8
.5-12
. 4-4
.9-20
. 5-2
.8-26
.2-39 Cold weather driving . Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . Precautions when starting and driving . 5-27
. 5-13
.5-2
. E
. Economy - fuel . Emission control information label
. Emission control system warranty . Engine
. 5-21
.9-12
.9-18
. Before starting the engine. Block heater . Capacities and recommended
. fuel/lubricants . Changing engine coolant . Changing engine oil . Changing engine oil filter . Checking engine coolant level . Checking engine oil level
. Engine compartment check locations . Engine coolant temperature gauge . Engine cooling system . Engine oil . Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . Engine oil viscosity . 5-11
.5-28
.9-2
. 8-9
.8-11
.8-12
. 8-9
.8-10
.8-6
. 2-5
. 8-8
.8-10
.9-6
. 9-6 F Flashers
(See hazard warning flasher switch) . Flat tire . Floor mat positioning aid . Fluid
. 2-35
.6-2
. 7-5
. Brake fluid . Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . Engine coolant. Engine oil . Windshield-washer fluid. F.M.V.S.S. certification label. Fog light switch . Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system) . Front seats . Fuel
. Capacities and recommended
. fuel/lubricants . Fuel economy . Fuel-filler door and cap . Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . 8-14
. 9-2
. 8-13
. 8-8
.8-10
.8-15
.9-11
.2-34
.1-45
. 1-2
. 9-2
.5-21
.3-30
.3-30 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 397 SESS: 9 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
. Fuel gauge . Fuel octane rating . Fuel recommendation . Loose fuel cap warning. Fuses . Fusible links . 2-5
. 9-4
. 9-3
.2-25, 3-30
.8-23
. 8-25
. Heater
. Heater and air conditioner
. controls . Heater operation . HomeLink Universal Transceiver. Hood release . Horn . 4-19, 4-28
.4-21, 4-28
.2-49
. 3-27
.2-35
. J Jump starting . 6-7 K Keyfob battery replacement . Keyless entry
. 8-27 G Garage door opener, HomeLink Universal Transceiver . Gas cap . Gauge
. Engine coolant temperature gauge . Fuel gauge . Odometer . Speedometer . Tachometer
. Trip odometer . General maintenance . Glove box. Glove box lock . Grocery hooks . 2-49
.3-30
.2-5
. 2-5
. 2-4
. 2-4
. 2-4
. 2-4
. 8-2
.2-41
.2-41
.2-42 H
. Hands-free phone system,
.4-70, 4-85, 4-96 Bluetooth . 2-35 Hazard warning flasher switch . 2-30 Headlight and turn signal switch . 2-30
. Headlight control switch . Headlights . 8-28
. 2-36
. Heated seats . Heated steering wheel
. 2-37
. I Ignition Switch
. Push-Button Ignition Switch . Immobilizer system . Important vehicle information label . In-cabin microfilter . Increasing fuel economy. Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
. reminders) . Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . Inside mirror . Instrument brightness control . Instrument panel . Instrument panel dimmer switch . Intelligent Key system
. 5-8
.2-27, 3-3, 5-11
.9-11
.8-21
.5-21
. 2-10
. 3-34
. 3-33
. 2-34
.0-6, 2-2
. 2-34
. Key operating range . Key operation . Mechanical key . Remote keyless entry operation . Troubleshooting guide . Warning signals . Interior light. Interior trunk lid release . iPod Player . ISOFIX child restraints . 3-8, 3-19
. 3-9
. 3-3
. 3-13, 3-19
.3-16, 3-24
.3-16, 3-24
. 2-47
. 3-29
.4-57, 4-59
. 1-21
. With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system) . Keys, For Intelligent Key system . L Labels
.3-13, 3-19
. 3-2
. Air conditioner specification label
. C.M.V.S.S. certification label
. Emission control information label
. Engine serial number
. F.M.V.S.S. certification label. Tire and Loading Information label . Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. Warning labels (for SRS) . 9-12
.9-11
.9-12
.9-11
.9-11
.9-12
.9-10
.1-52 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System . 1-21 License plate
. Installing the license plate . 9-13 Light
. Air bag warning light . Brake light (See stop light) . Bulb check/instrument panel . Bulb replacement . Charge warning light Console light . 1-52, 2-13
.8-32
. 2-10
. 8-32
.2-11
. 2-47
. 10-3 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 398 SESS: 9 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
. Fog light switch . Headlight and turn signal switch . Headlight control switch . Headlights . Interior light. Light bulbs . Low tire pressure warning light . Low windshield-washer fluid warning
. light . Passenger air bag and status light . Personal lights . Security indicator light. Spotlights (See map light) Trunk light
. Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . Lights Map lights . Lock
. 2-34
.2-30
.2-30
.8-28
.2-47
.8-28
.2-11
.2-24
.1-46
.2-48
.2-15
.2-48
.2-49
.2-10
.2-48
. Child safety rear door lock . Door locks . Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . Glove box lock . Power door locks . Trunk lid lock opener lever. Loose fuel cap warning. Low fuel warning light
. Low tire pressure warning light . Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. Luggage (See vehicle loading information)
.3-6
. 3-4
. 3-30
. 2-41
. 3-5
. 3-28
.2-25, 3-30
.2-13, 2-24
. 2-11
.2-24
.9-13
. M Maintenance General maintenance . 8-2 10-4
. Inside the vehicle . Maintenance precautions . Outside the vehicle . Seat belt maintenance. Under the hood and vehicle . Instrument brightness control . Malfunction indicator light . Manual front seat adjustment . Map lights . Map pocket. Meters and gauges . Mirror
. Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. Inside mirror . Outside mirror control . Outside mirrors . Vanity mirror . Moonroof . N NISSAN Intelligent Key . NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . NISSAN voice recognition system . O Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). Odometer . Oil
. 8-3
. 8-5
. 8-2
.1-17
. 8-4
.2-14
. 1-2
.2-48
.2-39
. 2-3
.2-34
.3-34
.3-33
.3-35
.3-35
.3-33
.2-45
. 3-18
.2-27, 3-3, 5-11
.4-106
. 9-4
.2-4 Capacities and recommended
. fuel/lubricants . Changing engine oil . 9-2
.8-11
. Changing engine oil filter . Checking engine oil level Engine oil . Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . Engine oil viscosity . Outside mirror control . Outside mirrors . Overheat
. 8-12
.8-10
.8-10
.9-6
. 9-6
.3-35
.3-35 If your vehicle overheats . Owners manual order form . Owners manual/service manual order information . 6-9
.9-21
. 9-21 P Parking Parking brake operation . Parking/parking on hills . Personal lights . Phone, Bluetooth hands-free system . Power
. Power door locks . Power outlet . Power rear windows . Power steering system . Power windows . Rear power windows . Precautions
. 5-19
.5-22
.2-48
.4-70, 4-85, 4-96
. 3-5
.2-38
.2-44
.5-23
.2-42
.2-44
. 8-5
. Maintenance precautions . Precautions on child restraints. Precautions on seat belt usage . Precautions on supplemental restraint system . 1-19, 1-25, 1-30, 1-33
.1-10
. 1-37 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 399 SESS: 9 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Precautions when starting and driving . Programmable features . Push starting. 5-2
.4-7
.6-9 Rear seat adjustment . Seatback pockets . Seat belt
. 1-6
.2-39 SRS warning label . Starting
. 1-52 R Radio
. Car phone or CB radio . FM-AM radio with compact disc
(CD) player . FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player . Readiness for inspection maintenance
(I/M) test . Rear power windows . Rear seat. RearView Monitor . Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch. Recorders
. 4-69
.4-39
.4-43, 4-48
. 9-20
.2-44
. 1-6
.4-11
. 2-29
. Event data . Refrigerant recommendation . Registering your vehicle in another country . Reporting safety defects (US only) . 9-20
. 9-7
.9-10
.9-19 S Safety Child safety rear door lock . Child seat belts . Reporting safety defects (US only) . 3-6
.1-19, 1-25, 1-30, 1-33
.9-19
. Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment Front power seat adjustment . 1-2
.1-4
.1-17
.1-18
.1-13
.1-18
.1-10
.1-13
.1-16
.1-17
.1-10
.1-16
.1-13
.2-13
.1-2
. 1-2
.2-36
.1-2
. 1-6
.2-15
. Child safety. Infants and small children . Injured Person . Larger children . Precautions on seat belt usage . Pregnant women . Seat belt extenders . Seat belt maintenance. Seat belts. Shoulder belt height adjustment . Three-point type with retractor . Seat belt warning light. Seats
. Adjustment. Front seats . Heated seats . Manual front seat adjustment . Rear seat. Security indicator light. Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
. system), engine start . Self-adjusting brakes . Service manual order form . Servicing air conditioner. Setting button . Shifting
.2-27, 3-3, 5-11
.8-23
. 9-21
. 4-30
. 4-7
. Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . Shift lock release. Shoulder belt height adjustment . Spark plug replacement . Speedometer . Spotlights (See map light)
. 5-14
.5-17
.1-16
.8-20
. 2-4
.2-48
. Before starting the engine. Jump starting . Precautions when starting and driving . Push starting. Starting the engine . 5-11
.6-7
. 5-2
. 6-9
.5-12 Steering
. Heated steering wheel
. Power steering system . Stop light . Storage . Sunglasses case. Sunglasses holder . Sunroof . Sunroof (see Moonroof) . Sun visors . Supplemental air bag warning light . Supplemental front impact air bag system . Supplemental restraint system
.2-37
. 5-23
. 8-32
. 2-39
. 2-39
. 2-39
. 2-45
. 2-45
. 3-32
. 1-52, 2-13
.1-45
. Information and warning labels . Precautions on supplemental restraint system . Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) . Switch
. 1-52
.1-37
.1-37
. Autolight switch . Automatic power window switch . Fog light switch . Hazard warning flasher switch . Headlight and turn signal switch . Headlight control switch . Power door lock switch . Rear window and outside mirror defroster
. switch. Turn signal switch . 2-32
.2-44
.2-34
.2-35
.2-30
.2-30
. 3-5
.2-29
.2-34 10-5 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 400 SESS: 9 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. Windshield wiper and washer switch . 2-37
.2-28 T
. Tachometer
. Temperature gauge
. Engine coolant temperature gauge . Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),
. engine start Three-way catalyst Tire
. 2-27, 3-3, 5-11
.5-2
. 2-4
.2-5 Transmission
. 8-13
. Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . Driving with Continuously Variable
. Transmission (CVT) . Shift selector lock release . Travel (See registering your vehicle in another
. country). Trip odometer . Trunk access through the rear seat Trunk lid lock opener lever. Trunk light
. Turn signal switch . 5-13
.5-17
.9-10
.2-4
. 1-6
.3-28
.2-49
.2-34
. Flat tire . Spare tire . Tire and Loading Information label . Tire chains . Tire placard. Tire pressure . Tire rotation. Types of tires . Uniform tire quality grading . Wheels and tires . Wheel/tire size. 6-2
.6-4, 8-47
.9-12
. 8-43
.9-12
. 8-35
. 8-44
. 8-42
. 9-17
.8-35
. 9-9
. Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light . Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . Towing
. 2-11
. 5-3
. Flat towing . Tow truck towing. Trailer towing . Transceiver HomeLink Universal Transceiver. 10-6
. 9-17
.6-10
.9-17
.2-49 U Uniform tire quality grading . USB interface
. 9-17 Audio file operation . 4-55, 4-56 V
. Vanity mirror . Variable voltage control system . Vehicle dimensions and weights . Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. Vehicle identification . Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) . Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. Vehicle loading information . Vehicle recovery . Vehicle security system . 3-33
.8-19
. 9-9
.2-37
.5-25
.9-10
.9-10
.9-10
.9-13
.6-12
.2-26 Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle immobi-
lizer system), engine start . Ventilators . Visors . Voice recognition system . 2-27, 3-3, 5-11
.4-18
. 3-32
. 4-106
. W Warning
. 1-52, 2-13 Air bag warning light . 2-10
. Anti-lock brake warning light . 2-11
. Battery charge warning light
.2-11
. Brake warning light
. 2-35 Hazard warning flasher switch . 2-13, 2-24 Low fuel warning light
. 2-11 Low tire pressure warning light . Low windshield-washer fluid warning
. light . Passenger air bag and status light . Seat belt warning light. Vehicle security system . Warning/indicator lights and audible
. reminders . Warning labels (for SRS) . 2-24
.1-46
.2-13
.2-26
.2-10
.1-52
.2-10
. Warning lights . Washer switch Windshield wiper and washer switch . Weights (See dimensions and weights) . Wheels and tires . Wheel/tire size. When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country . Windows
. Locking passengers windows . Power rear windows . 2-28
. 9-9
.8-35
. 9-9
.9-10
.2-44
.2-44
. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 401 SESS: 9 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
. Power windows . Rear power windows . Windshield-washer fluid. Windshield wiper and washer switch . Wiper
. Windshield wiper and washer switch . Wiper blades. 2-42
.2-44
.8-15
.2-28
.2-28
.8-21 10-7 REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 402 SESS: 9 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012 GAS STATION INFORMATION RECOMMENDED FUEL:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91). CAUTION Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst. Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-
versely affect the emission control de-
vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-
age caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-
fied by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbrevia-
tion or the appropriate percentage for that region. For additional information, see Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section. RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:
For QR25DE engine models:
Engine oil with API Certification Mark Viscosity SAE 0W-20 See Engine oil and oil filter recommendations in the Technical and consumer information sec-
tion of this manual. For VQ35DE engine models:
Engine oil with API Certification Mark Viscosity SAE 5W-30 See Engine oil and oil filter recommendations in the Technical and consumer information sec-
tion of this manual. COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
See Tire and Loading Information label. The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the drivers door. For additional information, see Wheels and tires in the Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual. RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 mi (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the Break-in schedule information found in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Fol-
low these recommendations for the future reli-
ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life. REVIEW COPY2013 Altima Sedan (asd) Owners ManualUSA_English (nna) 03/27/12dmoore
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2012-09-03 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2012-08-10 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2012-09-03
|
||||
1 2 |
2012-08-10
|
|||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Robert Bosch Car Multimedia GmbH
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0019732882
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
Robert-Bosch-Strasse 200
|
||||
1 2 |
Hildesheim, N/A 31139
|
|||||
1 2 |
Germany
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
o******@cetecom.com
|
||||
1 2 |
k******@cetecom.com
|
|||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
YBN
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
LCN20A
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
D**** Z****
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
Team Manager Approval
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
+49 5******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
+4951********
|
||||
1 2 |
D******@de.bosch.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Radio Navigation System with Bluetooth | ||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Permissive Change Class II Power listed is conducted. | ||||
1 2 | Power listed is conducted. | |||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
CTC advanced GmbH (former CETECOM ICT Services )
|
||||
1 2 |
Eurofins Product Service GmbH
|
|||||
1 2 | Name |
G****** S****
|
||||
1 2 |
J**** K********
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
49-68********
|
||||
1 2 |
49-33********
|
|||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
49-68********
|
||||
1 2 |
49-33********
|
|||||
1 2 |
t******@ctcadvanced.com
|
|||||
1 2 |
j******@eurofins.de
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0010000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0010000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC